Home
        Samsung SL-C467W User Manual
         Contents
1.                             F PEK 2000m LAF Hh ZEE                   2000m KA trait AY H Sark tome GO CHE AG GOW Getty  8  en ee E T hi EB    Dan hab yungh youq gij digih haijbaz 2000 m doxroengz haenx ancienz sawjyungh           Correct disposal of this product  Waste electrical  amp     electronic equipment         Applicable in countries with separate collection  systems        product and its electronic accessories  e g  charger  headset  USB cable    mmm  should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of  their working life  To prevent possible harm to the environment or  human health from uncontrolled waste disposal  please separate these  items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the  sustainable reuse of material resources     X This marking on the product  accessories or literature indicates that the    Household users should contact either the retailer where they  purchased this product  or their local government office  for details of  where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe  recycling     Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and  conditions of the purchase contract  This product and its electronic  accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for  disposal     5  Appendix 126     Regulatory information        The United States of America only        Radio frequency emissions       Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler  To find the nea
2.           a  C46xFW only   b  C46xWonly  c  This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup D    Menu overview    TCP IP  IPv4   DHCP  BOOTP  Static   TCP IP  IPv6   IPv6 Activate  DHCPv6 Config   Ethernet Speed  Automatic  10Mbps Half  10Mbps Full  100Mbps Half  100Mbps Full    a  C46xFW only     Network  Wireless  Wi Fi ON OFF  Wi Fi Direct  WPS Setting  WLAN Setting     WLAN Default  WLAN Signal  Clear Setting  Network Conf   Protocol Mgr   Net  Activate  Http Activate  WINS  SNMP V1 V2  UPnP SSDP   MDNS  SetIP  SLP       2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 136    Machine   s basic settings    L        e You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in  Samsung Easy Printer Manager program       For Windows and Mac users  you set from Samsung Easy Printer    Manager  gt      Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device Settings   see  Device Settings  on page 269     e lt may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for  some models     After installation is complete  you may want to set the machine s default  settings     To change the machine s default settings  follow these steps     L        It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some  models     Select KE  Menu  button on the control panel     Press System Setup 5 Machine Setup     Select the option you want  then press OK     Language  change the language that is displayed on the control  panel     
3.          3 Close the scanner lid     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup ao     Media and tray    L        Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and  toner consumption     Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout  Always  keep it clean  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89      If you are copying a page from a book or magazine  lift the scanner lid  until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid  If the  book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm  start copying with the scanner  lid open     Be careful not to break the scanner glass  You may get hurt     Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid  The scanner lid may fall  on your hands and get hurt     Do not look into the light from inside of the scanner while copying or  scanning  It is harmful to eyes     In the document feeder       1 Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  loading originals        2 Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray  Make sure  that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on  the document input tray           2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup EJ    Media and tray    Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size   3          WA Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout   Always keep the glass clean  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89               2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup El    Basic printing             a
4.       DENMARK    70 70 19 70    www samsung com   dk support             DOMINICA    1 800 751 2676    www samsung com   latin support   Spanish     www samsung com   latin_en support   English           DRC    499999    www samsung com   support          ECUADOR    1 800 10 72670  1 800 SAMSUNG  72 6786     www samsung com   latin support   Spanish     www samsung com   latin_en   support English           CANADA  www samsung com   ca_fr support  French   ernie 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com    HHP  02 24828200 cl support  CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com   cn support  Bogota 600 12 72 www samsung com   COLOMBIA Gratis desde cualquier parte del   0 support  pais 01 8000 112 112 6 desde su  celular  SAM 726   0 800 507 7267 www samsung com   00 800 1 SAMSUNG  726 7864    latin support   Spanish   COSTA RICA  www samsung com   latin_en support   English   CROATIA 072 726 786 www samsung com   hr support  8000 0077 www samsung com     Cote D    Ivoire             africa_fr support          EGYPT       08000 726786  16580       www samsung com   eg support    Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 321     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    0818 717100    WebSite       Country Region    Customer Care Center    0800 10077    WebSite    www samsung com                                EIRE a  ie support  800 6225 www samsung com   latin support   Spanish   EL SALVADOR  www samsung com   latin_en support   English   ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com   e
5.       In the Printing Preferences window  click the Advanced tab   Select Edit in the Text drop down list    Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box   Click Delete    When a confirming message window appears  click Yes     Overlay     Deleting a page  overlay     DaN TF O    Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window  You can delete page overlays that you no longer use        4  Special Features 236    Printing features    Some features may not be available depending on models or options  It  means that the features are not supported        Printing a document       When you print with a Mac  you need to check the printer driver settings in each  application you use  Follow the steps below to print from a Mac     1 Open the document to print     2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup  Document Setup in some  applications      3 Choose your paper size  orientation  scaling  other options  and make  sure that your machine is selected  Click OK     4 Open the File menu and click Print   Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print   5    6 Click Print     Changing printer settings       You can use advanced printing features when using your machine     Open an application and select Print from the File menu  The machine name   which appears in the printer properties window  may differ depending on the  machine in use  Except for the name  the composition of the printer properties  window is similar to the following     Printing 
6.      Installing driver over the network    10 Input the printer description and Next     1 1 After the machine is added  click Finish     1 2 When installation is done  click Finish     Add a network printer       O N O UU AWN      Double click the Unified Driver Configurator    Click Add Printer    The Add printer wizard window opens  Click Next    Select Network printer and click the Search button    The printer s IP address and model name appears on list field   Select your machine and click Next    Enter the printer description and click Next     After the machine is added  click Finish     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 155    IPv6 configuration    A IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher  From the control panel    Activating IPv6       2 e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7 or  Menu             overview  on page 31   1 Press the KEI  Menu  button on the control panel   e Ifthe IPv6 network seems to not be working  set all the network setting  to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting  2 Press Network 5 TCP IP  IPv6  5 IPv6 Activate   3 Select On and press OK   The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and  managements  4 Turn the machine off and turn it on again   Link local Address  Self configured local IPv6 address  Address starts with  FESO   A When you install the printer driver  do not configure both IPv4 and  
7.      X  Setup exe replacing    X    with the letter  which represents your CD   ROM drive and click OK     2 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     3 Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen  Then   click Next     1  Introduction EI    Reinstalling the driver    If the printer driver does not work properly  follow the steps below to reinstall  the driver     1 From the Start menu  select Programs or All Programs  gt  Samsung  Printers  gt  Uninstall Samsung Printer Software     2 Follow the instructions in the installation window     3 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive and install the driver  again  see  Installing the driver locally  on page 28      1  Introduction 29    2  Menu Overview and  Basic Setup    This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options     Menu overview 31  Machine s basic settings 37  Media and tray 39  Basic printing 52  Basic copying 58  Basic scanning 63  Basic faxing 64    Using USB memory device 69        Menu overview       The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions           Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine          Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models     e The menus are described in the Advanced Guide  see  Useful Setting Men
8.     Toner cartridge produces fewer Your originals may contain pictures  solids  or heavy lines  For example  your originals may be forms  newsletters  books  or other  copies than expected before documents that use more toner     running out of toner    The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made     e Turn the machine off and back on        6  Troubleshooting 291     Scanning problems    Condition    The scanner does not work     Suggested solutions  Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass  or face up in the document feeder  see   Loading originals  on page 48      There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan  Try the Prescan function to see if that works   Try lowering the scan resolution rate     Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly     Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective  Switch the printer cable with a known good cable  If necessary  replace  the printer cable     Check that the scanner is configured correctly  Check scan setting in the Easy Document Creator or the application you want to use  to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port  for example  USB001         The unit scans very slowly     Check if the machine is printing received data  If so  scan the document after the received data has been printed     Graphics are scanned more slowly than text        Message appears on your  computer screen     e De
9.    Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD   since the printer driver includes the scan program  see  Installing the driver  locally  on page 28      N             Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      Select  scan   gt  Scan to PC  gt  Network PC on the control panel     If you see Not Available message  check the port connection     Select your registered computer ID  and enter the Password if  necessary     4  Special Features ga    Scan features    L         ji us    ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer    Fa    Manager  gt  77 Switch to advanced mode  gt  Scan to PC Settings     Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy    Printer Manager  gt  aa Switch to advanced mode  gt  Scan to PC  Settings     Select the option you want and press OK   Scanning begins   Scanned image is saved in computer   s C  Users users name My    Documents  The saved folder may differ  depending on your operating  system or the application you are using     Scanning to WSD    Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the  computer supports the WSD  Web Service for Device  feature  To use the WSD  feature  you need to install the WSD printer driver on your computer  For  Windows 7  you can install the WSD driver by Control Panel  gt  Devices and  Printe
10.    Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder     Presse  fax   gt  13  Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Add Page on the control  panel     Select the fax job and press OK     When you have finished  select No when Another Page  appears  The  machine scans the original into memory     Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Canceling a reserved fax job       Press  amp   fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Cancel Job on the control  panel     Select the fax job you want and press OK     Press OK when Yes highlights     The selected fax is deleted from memory     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     4  Special Features 252    Fax features    Sending a priority fax    This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved  operations  The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted  when the current operation is finished     1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder     2 Press  amp   Fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Priority Send on the  control panel     3 Enter the destination fax number and press OK   4 Enter the job name and press OK     5 If an original is placed on the scanner glass  select Yes to add another  pages  Load another original and press OK     When you have finished  select No when Another Page  appears     The machine starts to scan and s
11.    Web Service window opens  move the mouse    cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network  Settings     4 Click TCP IPv6 on the left pane of the website     5  6  7    K             Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6   Click the Apply button     Turn the machine off and turn it on again     You can also set the DHCPv6     To manually set the IPv6 address    Check the Manual Address check box  Then  the Address Prefix text  box is activated  Enter the rest of the address   e g    3FFE 10 88 194  AAAA     A    is the hexadecimal 0 through 9  A  through F      IPv6 address configuration       Start a web browser  such as Internet Explorer  that supports IPv6  addressing as a URL     Select one of the IPv6 addresses  Link local Address  Stateless  Address  Stateful Address  Manual Address  from Network  Configuration Report  see  Printing a network configuration report  on  page 148      Link local Address  Self configured local IPv6 address  Address  starts with FE80      Stateless Address  Automatically configured IPv6 address by a  network router     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    IPv6 configuration    Stateful Address  IPv6 address configured by a DHCPV6 server     Manual Address  Manually configured IPv6 address by a user     3 Enter the IPv6 addresses  e g    http    FE80  2 15 99FF FE66 7701       A Address must be enclosed in       brackets     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 158    Wireless network setup    KA e Make
12.    and set type to Thick  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54      6  Troubleshooting 282      Printing quality problems    If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly  there might be a reduction in print quality  See the table below to clear the problem        Condition Suggested solutions   Light or faded print e Ifa vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page  the toner supply is low  Install a new toner cartridge  see  Replacing the  toner cartridge  on page 81     AaBbCc e Ifa vertical white streak or faded area still appears on the page even though the machine has enough toner supply  open and close   AaBbCc the front door 3   4 times  see  Machine overview  on page 19     AG ba   The paper may not meet paper specifications  for example  the paper may be too moist or rough    fe pa   If the entire page is light  the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on  Adjust the print resolution and turn  the toner save mode off  See the help screen of the printer driver              A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning  Clean the inside of your machine   see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89      e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page  89   If these steps do not correct the problem  contact a service representative        The top half of the paper is The to
13.    oE    ventilation     This product s ozone emission rate is under 0 1 ppm  Because  ozone is heavier than air  keep the product in a place with good    5  Appendix 124     Regulatory information                Mercury Safety Recycling       ENERGY STAR       Contains Mercury  Dispose According to Local  State or Federal  Laws  U S A  only     Power saver    This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that  reduces power consumption when it is not in active use     When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of  time  power consumption is automatically lowered     ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S  marks     For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http     www energystar gov    For ENERGY STAR certified models  the ENRGY STAR label will be on  your machine  Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified     Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an    AO environmentally responsible manner     5  Appendix 125    Regulatory information    China only       Fa  WSC NF BF       WNT RD ASE  RAT AZ BFE NIT in ENE T YAS EIA AR    BONS TCE    EU Wc FAS BAP m NIRA           HEERA ME ETE mht  BORN RAE BE          BANS RIN AGES      Website  http   www samsung com cn support location     supportServiceLocation do page SERVICE LOCATION     H E BE Cha R    a 79 SLAVIERE  kWh     press C460W                          Ha El A fr ME GB 21521 2014       H    Pb IAA          press C460FW el       DE
14.    ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically           1  Introduction 16      Safety information    Do not place the machine on an unstable surface     The machine could fall  causing injury or machine damage        Use only No 26 AWG  or larger  telephone line cord  if necessary     Otherwise  it can cause damage to the machine     Maintenance   Checking       A Caution          Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical  outlet     Otherwise  this could result in electric shock or fire        Oo O OO    Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe  operation  If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters  6  feet  with a 110V machine  then the gauge should be 16 AWG or  larger     Otherwise  it can cause damage to the machine  and could result  in electric shock or fire        Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the  inside of the machine  Do not clean the machine with benzene   paint thinner or alcohol  do not spray water directly into the  machine     This could result in electric shock or fire           O    Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight  location  such as a closet     If the machine is not well ventilated  this could result in fire        When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or  cleaning the inside  do not operate the machine     You could get injured           O    Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords     This can dimini
15.   Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience       The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning     1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder     2 Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen     3 Click Scan   Past       4 Set up the scanning parameters such as image type  document size  and  resolution     5 Click Prescan c  to check the image     6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as  rotate and mirror     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User gg    Accessing management tools    Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers  For  more information on each tool  refer to  Useful Management Tools  on page    259     1  2  3  4       From the Charms  select Search 5 Apps   Find Samsung Printers   Under Samsung Printers  you can see installed management tools     Click the management tool you want to use     After installing the driver  for some management tools  you can access them  directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User      Installing accessories    When you install optional devices  such as optional tray  memory  etc  this  machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices  If you cannot use  the optional devices you installed in this driver  you can set the optional devices  in Device Settings to use     1 From the Charms  select Search
16.   Sets the brightness level to scan an original   3 Select the desired status you want and press OK   4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options     5 Press    stop clear  to return to ready mode     You can change the default scan settings  Refer to the Advanced Guide        Printing from a USB memory device    You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device   File is supported by Direct Print option     PRN  Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  compatible     If you print PRN files created from other machine  the printout would be  different        TIFF  TIFF 6 0 Baseline  JPEG  JPEG Baseline    PDF  PDF 1 7 or lower version    To print a document from a USB memory device       Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine   and then press Direct USB     2 Select USB Print     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup      Using USB memory device    3    Select the folder or file you want and press OK     If you see     or  D  in the front of a folder name  there are one or more  files or folders in the selected folder     Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number     Press OK  Start or Print to start printing the selected file     After printing the file  the display asks if you want to print another job     Press OK when Yes appears to print another job  and repeat from step 2     Otherwise  press the left right arrow to select No and press OK     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Ma
17.   System  gt  Eco Settings  or Samsung Easy  Printer Manager  Device Settings  gt  Eco        Default Eco  The machine is set to Default Eco mode       Custom Eco  Change any necessary values     3 Press OK to save the selection     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup E3    Basic printing    Setting eco mode on the driver e The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may  differ depending on the operating system used  computing performance     application software  connection method  media type  thickness   media  size  job complexity  etc        Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode  When you see the eco image       4   that  means the eco mode is currently enabled     Eco options  Printer Default  Follows the settings from the machine s control panel   None  Disables Eco mode     Eco Printing  Enables eco mode  Activate the various Eco items you want to  use     Password  If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode  you have to  enter the password to change the status     Result simulator    Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide  used  electricity  and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you  selected     The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed  paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled     Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2  energy  and paper from IEA   the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japa
18.   The life of the transfer belt  will expired soon     Replace the transfer belt  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives        Replace new    Transfer belt    The life of the transfer belt  has expired     Replace the transfer belt  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives        Transfer Belt Error       The transfer belt cannot be  controlled        Reboot the power and try    the printing job again  If  the problem persists   please call for service     Replace Install  Waste Toner Tank       The life span of the waste  toner container has expired  and the printer will stop  printing until a new waste  toner container is placed  into the printer        Replace a waste toner  container with a  Samsung genuine waste  toner container     4  Troubleshooting 112    J Understanding display messages    Message    Prepare new    Imaging unit    Meaning    The life of the imaging unit  will be expired soon        Replace with    new imaging unit    The life of the imaging unit  will be expired        Install    imaging unit    The imaging unit is not  installed    Suggested solutions    Replace the imagingunit  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives        Error  error number     Door open close       The imaging unit is installed  improperly  or the cover is  not securely latched        Reinstall the imaging unit  to confirm it is seated  properly  Close the cover  until it locks into place     4  Troubleshooting 113    5  Appendix    Th
19.   The paper size and the paper size settings do not  match     Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray     Or  ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection  in the software application settings you use  see  Opening printing preferences  on  page 54         The machine prints  but  the text is wrong   garbled  or incomplete        The machine cable is loose or defective        Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect  Try a print job that you have already  printed successfully  If possible  attach the cable and the machine to another computer  that you know works and try a print job  Finally  try a new machine cable     6  Troubleshooting 280    Printing problems    Condition    Possible cause    The wrong printer driver was selected     Suggested solutions    Check the application   s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected        The software application is malfunctioning     Try printing a job from another application        The operating system is malfunctioning     Exit Windows and reboot the computer  Turn the machine off and back on again        Pages print  but they are  blank     The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner     Redistribute the toner  if necessary   If necessary  replace the toner cartridge   e See  Redistributing toner  on page 79     e See  Replacing the toner cartridge  on page 81        The file may have blank pages     Check the 
20.   Turn the power off and on after you change this    option          Http Activate  You can set whether to use SyncThru     Web Service or not     WU Turn the power off and on after you change this  option              e WINS  You can configure the WINS server   WINS Windows Internet Name Service  is used in the  Windows operating system     Turn the power off and on after you change this  option              3  Useful Setting Menus 221    Network setup    Option    Protocol Mgr    continued            Description    SNMP V1 V2  You have to enable this option to use  SNMP V1 V2 protocol  Administrator s can use SNMP  to monitor and manage machines on the network   UPnP SSDP   You have to enable this option to use  UPnP SSDP  protocol     Turn the power off and on after you change this  option        MDNS  You have to enable this option to use MDNS   Multicast Domain Name System  protocol     SetIP  You have to enable this option to use SetIP  protocol     SLP  You can configure SLP  Service Location  Protocol  settings  This protocol allows host  applications to find services in a local area network  without prior configuration     Turn the power off and on after you change this  option     3  Useful Setting Menus 222    4  Special Features    This chapter explains special copying  scanning  faxing  and printing features     Altitude adjustment   Entering various characters  Setting up the fax address book  Printing features   Scan features   Fax features    r     The procedu
21.   gt  Settings   Search for Devices and Printers   Right click on your printer icon and select Printer properties     KA If Printer properties item has a B mark  you can select other printer drivers  connected with the selected printer        Select Device Settings     The Printer properties window may differ depending on the driver or  operating system you are using     la A       5 Select the appropriate option     6 Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User gg    i Troubleshooting    Problem    Samsung Printer  Experience is not shown  when you click more  settings     Suggested Solutions    Samsung Printer Experience is not installed   Download the app  from the Windows Store and  install it        Machine information is  not displayed when you  click the device in the  Devices and Printers        Check the Printer properties  Click the Ports tab      Control Panel  gt  Devices and Printers  gt  Right click  on your printer icon and select Printer properties     If the port is set to File or LPT  uncheck them and  select TCP IP  USB  or WSD     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User gg     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products  contact    the Samsung customer care center     Country Region    021 36 11 00    Customer Care Center    WebSite             Country Region    Customer Care Center    WebSite                                                 ALGERIA wna sat SUng  cont  n_a
22.  3  Useful Setting Menus 204    Print       Description    Affects the resolution and clarity of your color output    e Enhanced  This mode will generate printouts with  sharp texts and smooth graphic photo objects in the  page      Detailed  This mode will generate printouts with  sharp details over the entire page     e Normal  This mode will generate printouts with  smooth tone over the entire page        Selects this option to print texts clearer than on a normal  document           Allows you to append the required carriage return to  each line feed  which is useful for Unix or DOS users                 Item  Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31    To change the menu options  Screen   gt  Press T3  Menu   gt  Print Setup on the control panel   Item Description      Selects the direction in which information is printed ona Clear Text  Orientation  page   p You can enter the number of copies using the number Auto CR  Copies  keypad   Emulation  Specifies the number of dots printed per inch  dpi   The  Resolution higher the setting  the sharper printed characters and  graphics   Reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color  Trapping channels in color printing mode  Also black text will be  overprinted on other colors     the printi lity by selecting the d t  Dec  ment Type mproves the printing qua i y y selecting the documen  type for the current printi
23.  Contact Information  Shows the contact information     Link  Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check    information   5  Useful Management Tools 265      Using SyncThru    Web Service    Setting the system LATE CAN UE       This setting is necessary for using the e mail notification option     2 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine        1 Start a web browser  such as Internet Explorer  from Windows     Enter the machine IP address  http   xxx xxx xxx xxx  in the address field  and press the Enter key or click Go     2 Your machine s embedded website opens   3 From the Security tab  select System Security 5 System Administrator    4 Enter the name of the administrator  phone number  location  and email  address     5 Click Apply     5  Useful Management Tools 266    Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager    The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic    2 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods sections as described in the table that follows    see  Software  on page 8         e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only  see  Software  on page 8    KU The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are    e For Windows  Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum  using     requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager         a Samsung Easy Printer Manager    Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an app
24.  KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or       models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31      To change the menu options       Press 53   Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Paper Setup on the control panel                 Item Description  Paper Size Sets the paper size as pa Letter  or other paper sizes   according to your requirements   Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray   Margin Sets the margins for the document        3  Useful Setting Menus      System setup    Sound   Volume Item    Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31         To change the menu options        Description    Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line  through the speaker  such as a dial tone or a fax tone   With this option set to Comm  which means the speaker  is on until the remote machine answers     9 You can adjust the volume level using On Hook  Dial  You can adjust the speaker volume only  when the telephone line is connected     a Press Lifa on the control panel    b Press On Hook Dial  A dial tone sounds from  the speaker    c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you  want    d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and  return to ready mode        Speaker  e Press EF   Menu   gt  System Setup 5 Sound Volume on the control panel   Item Description  Turns the key sound on or off  With th
25.  LAN simultaneously   ID  admin    f     Password  sec00000  10 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive  and follow the    instructions in the window to set up the wireless network  5 When the SyncThru    Web Service window opens  click Network    Settings     Turning the Wi Fi network on off 6 Click Wireless  gt  Custom   You can also turn the Wi Fi network on off        Li If your machine has a display  you can also turn on off the Wi Fi from the  machine   s control panel using the Network menu              1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine  If not   connect the machine with a standard network cable     2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer  Safari  or Firefox and enter  your machine s new IP address in the browser window     For example        hittp   192  168  1 133     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 185    Wireless network setup    Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing       Wi Fi Direct is an easy to setup peer to peer connection method between the  Wi Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure  connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode     With Wi Fi Direct  you can connect your printer to a Wi Fi Direct network while  concurrently connecting to an access point  You can also use a wired network  and a Wi Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print  documents both from Wi Fi Direct and from a wired network     KU e You cannot connect your mo
26.  Mode    Item    Receive Mode    Description    Selects the default fax receiving mode        Ring To Answer    Specifies the number of times the machine rings before  answering an incoming call        Automatically prints the page number  and the date       Stamp RCV Name and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a  received fax   Initiates fax reception from an extension phone  plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the   Rcv Start Code machine  If you pick up the extension phone and hear       fax tones  enter the code  It is preset to  9  at the  factory        Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer  several different telephone numbers  You can set the  machine to recognize different ring patterns for each  number  This setting may not be available depending  on your country  see  Receiving faxes using DRPD  mode  on page 256      3  Useful Setting Menus aaa    Fax             page 31      e Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on    To change the menu options     e Press 45  fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Setup on the control panel              Item    Change Default    Description    Resets the value or setting to the printer s out of box  state        Auto Report    Sets the machine to print a report with detailed  information about the previous 50 communication  operations including time and dates        Manual TX RX       Setting this op
27.  Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs     3 Click Samsung Printers  and start Samsung Easy Document Creator     Click Scan       from the home screen     4  Special Features ga    Scan features    Scanning from USB connected machine    Scanning from network connected machine          1    w       VI       Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48     Start Applications and click Image Capture    If No Image Capture device connected message appears  disconnect the  USB cable and reconnect it  If the problem continues  refer to the Image  Capture   s help    Select the option you want    Scan and save your scanned image     If scanning does not operate in Image Capture  update Mac OS to the latest  version        3  4    6    KU Network or wireless model only  see  Features by model  on page 7      Make sure that your machine is connected to a network     Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      Start Applications and click Image Capture     According to OS  follow steps below     For 10 5    Click Devices  gt  Brow
28.  You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  5 Press Save  gt  OK  Detection  DRPD  feature  Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to  answer several different telephone numbers  For further details  see    i z  Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  on page 256   Changing the receive modes    Press ae  fax   gt  T5  Menu   gt  Fax Setup  gt  Receiving  gt  Receive Mode 2 This setting may not be available depending on your country     on the control panel        2 Select the option you want  3 Press OK     Fax  Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax 4 Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode   reception mode     Tel  Receives a fax by pressing Qon Hook Dial  and then Gp    tart bution Receiving manually in Tel mode    Ans Fax  Is for when an answering machine is attached to your   machine  Your machine answers an incoming call  and the callercan You can receive a fax call by pressing  ton Hook Dial  button and then  leave a message on the answering machine  If the fax machine  senses a fax tone on the line  the machine automatically switches to  Fax mode to receive the fax     pressing Gp  Start  when you hear a fax tone     4  Special Features 255    Fax features    Receiving in Answering Machine Fax mode    Receiving faxes with an extension telephone       To use this mode  you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on  the back of your machine  If the ca
29.  and enter it  without the colons  For example  00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes  0015992951A8     Click Apply  and then click OK  The machine will automatically print the  Network Configuration Report  Confirm that all the settings are  correct     IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Mac        Before using the SetIP program  disable the computer firewall from System  Preferences  gt  Security  gt  Firewall     Q The following instructions may vary from your model        N OAU A    Connect your machine to the network with a network cable     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop   For Mac OS X 10 8  Double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder     Double click the MAC_Installer folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   Click Continue   Read the license agreement and click Continue     Click Agree to agree to the license agreement     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 149      Wired network setup    8    11    12    13       14    Click Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  installed     If you click Customize  you can choose individual components to install     Enter the password and click OK     When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  computer appears  click Continue     Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless  on the Printer  Connection Type and click Set IP Address button     Click the    icon  third from left  in the SetIP window to
30.  any move or trip for any restrictions on  the use of a wireless device in the destination country     If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless  device  do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields  are in place and the system is fully assembled     Wireless devices are not user serviceable  Do not modify them in any  way  Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to  use it  Contact manufacturer for service     Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be  used  See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit  or contact  manufacturer Technical Support for additional information     5  Appendix 135    Regulatory information                   China only    Pe ti PA A a 44 BR Be                                                                                                                                                 BEY   ma i   a xa   sax   sax   Pb   Hg   Cd   Grea   PBB   PBDE    NO  O O O O O O  STB  MA  x O O O O  0   ENEI LPR BLE  PCA  xX O O O O  0   HAR Ek X O O O O O  EWA X O O O O O  ma x O O O O  0   PURB x O O O O  0   ABA X O O O O O  IGAN x O O O O O  ARAB    CCD  WRA    X xX O O O  0   HRA   e  aR    X O O O O O  EN An FL AR HE  PBA  X O O O O O  HEL O O O O O O  FRA O O O O O O          ASRS RHE SI T 11364 HIRE Sa Hil   O  RNFREWRE ABE ROR PNG GB T 26572 BLIP BERD o          X  RANA WRB FE AME REIMA EN E GB T 26572 Bie IS PRE BE OK    5  Appendix 136    Copyright       2013 
31.  are not a super user  ask your system administrator     From the Samsung website  download the Unified Linux Driver package  to your computer    Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package   Double click cdroot  gt  autorun    When the welcome screen appears  click Next     When the installation is complete  click Finish     The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon  and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience  If you  have any difficulties  consult the on screen help that is available through your  system menu or from the driver package Windows applications  such as Unified  Driver Configurator or Image Manager     1  Software Installation 144     Reinstallation for Linux    If the printer driver does not work properly  uninstall the driver and reinstall it     1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     2 When the Administrator Login window appears  type    root    in the  Login field and enter the system password   You must log in as a super user  root  to uninstall the printer driver  If you  are not a super user  ask your system administrator    3 Open the Terminal program  When the Terminal screen appears  type in  the following    root localhost root  cd  opt Samsung mfp uninstall      root localhost uninstall    uninstall sh  4 Click Next     5 Click Finish     1  Software Installation 145    2  Using a Network   Connected Machine    This chapter giv
32.  as your network machine  The following table shows the network environments supported by the  machine     Items Specifications    Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 Base TX Wired Lan  e 802 11b g n Wireless LAN       Network operating system   Windows   XP  Windows Server   2003  Windows Vista    Windows  7  Windows Server  2008 R2  Windows   8  e Various Linux OS  e Mac OS X 10 5  10 9       Network protocols e TCP IPv4   e DHCP  BOOTP     DNS  WINS  Bonjour  SLP  UPnP     Standard TCP IP Printing  RAW   LPR  IPP  WSD   e SNMPv 1 2 3  HTTP     TCP IPv6  DHCP  DNS  RAW  LPR  SNMPv 1 2 3  HTTP        Wireless security e Authentication  Open System  Shared Key  WPA Personal  WPA2 Personal  PSK   e Encryption  WEP64  WEP128  TKIP  AES       5  Appendix 123    Regulatory information    This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with  several regulatory statements     Laser safety statement    The printer is certified in the U S  to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21  CFR  chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1  laser products  and elsewhere is  certified as a Class   laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825   1 2007     Class   laser products are not considered to be hazardous  The laser system and  printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above  a Class   level during normal operation  user maintenance or prescribed service  condition     Warning       Never operate or service the printer with the p
33.  between your computer       and printer  Setup will connect your computer to the printer wirelessly   While configuring the wireless settings for the printer  your Internet may be disconnected        Using a USB cable  Configure wireless settings to the printer through a USB connection                               2 Even if your computer is running Windows 7 or higher  you cannot use this 7 When the wireless network set up is completed  click Next     feature if your PC does not support wireless network  Set the wireless  network using a USB cable  see  Access point via USB cable  on page 166         8 Follow the instructions in the installation window     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    Ad hoc via USB cable       If you do not have an access point  AP   you may still connect the machine  wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by  following the simple steps below     Items to prepare  Network connected computer  Software CD that was provided with your machine  A machine installed with a wireless network interface    USB cable    Creating the ad hoc network in Windows    1  2    Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        If the installation window does not appear  click Start 5 All programs 5  Accessories 5 Run     X  Setup exe replacing    X    with the letter  which represents your CD   ROM drive and click OK     Review and accept th
34.  changed    PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  update the PIN number     5 The printer starts printing     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 194    Using the NFC feature  Scanning 2 e For some cell phones  NFC antenna might not be located at the back of  the cell phone  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your cell phone    before tagging        1 eat NEC and wer Direct enabled EARE ee cell prone   If error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a changed  and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer  see  Setting up Wi Fi PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  Direct  on page 186   update the PIN number     e Ifyou do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your cell    2 Tag the NFC antenna on your cell phone usually located on the back of phone  it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app    the cell phone  over the NFC tag   nec  on your printer  download page  Download the app and try again     Wait few seconds for Samsung Mobile Print app to start     3 Select scan mode     4 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      If neccessary  change the scan option by pressing the 5        2  Using a Network Connected Machine 195    Using the NFC feature    5                Tag the NFC antenna on your cell phone usually located on the back of    the cell phone  ove
35.  default machine driver            a  lt dest_path gt     or     A  lt dest_path gt        Specifies destination path  for installation     E The destination  path should be a  fully qualified path        Since machine drivers  should be installed on the  OS specific location  this  command applies to only  application software      xor     X    Uses existing machine  driver files to create printer  instance if it is already  installed     This command provides a  way to install a printer  instance that uses installed  printer driver files without  installing an additional  driver            n  lt Printer name gt      or     N    lt Printer name gt           Specifies printer name   Printer instance shall be  created as specified printer  name        With this parameter  you  can add printer instances as  you wish      up    lt printer  name gt     or     UP    lt printer  name gt           Removes only specified  printer instance and not the  driver files        This command provides a  way to remove only  specified printer instance  from your system without  effecting other printer  drivers  It will not remove  printer driver files from your  system     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 152    Installing driver over the network    Command line     dor   D    Definition    Uninstalls all device drivers  and applications from your  system     Description    This command will remove  all installed device drivers  and application software  from your system         v  lt shar
36.  faxes from being accessed by  unauthorized people  Turn on secure receiving mode  then all incoming faxes  go into memory  You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password        7 To use the secure receiving mode  activate the menu from pi  fax   gt  13   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Secure Receive on the control panel     Printing received faxes       1 Select 4  fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Secure Receive  gt  Print  on the control panel     2 Enter a four digit password and press OK     3 The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory     4  Special Features    Fax features    Receiving faxes in memory    Since your machine is a multi tasking device  it can receive faxes while you are  making copies or printing  If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing   your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory  Then  as soon as you finish  copying or printing  the machine automatically prints the fax     WA If fax is received and being printed  other copy and print jobs cannot be  processed at the same time              Printing sent fax report automatically    You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the  previous 50 communication operations  including time and dates     1 Press Pi  fax   gt  13  Menu   gt  Fax Setup  gt  Auto Report  gt  On on the  control panel     2 Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     4  Special Features 258    5  Useful Management  Tools    This chapter introduce
37.  gt  Eco Settings on    The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage  The Eco function the control panel   allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing       2 Select the option you want and press OK   If you press the Eco button from the control panel  eco mode is enabled  The    default setting of Eco mode is Multiple Pages per Side  2  and Toner Save     Default Mode  Select this to turn on or off the eco mode   Some features may not be available depending on the model    Off  Set the eco mode off       On  Set the eco mode on     2 e You can set the machine   s settings by using the Device Settings in    Samsung Easy Printer Manager program   E 7 oe lees WU If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru    Web    Service  Settings tab  gt  Machine Settings  gt  System  gt  Eco Settings  or            For Windows and Mac users  you set from Samsung Easy Printer       Manager  gt  72  Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device Settings  Samsung Easy Printer Manager  Device Settings  gt  Eco   the On force  see  Device Settings  on page 269  message appears  You have to enter the password to change the eco mode  e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for status     some models     Select Temp   Follow the settings from Syncthru    Web Service or  Samsung Easy Printer Manager  Before you select this item  you  must set the eco function in SyncThru    Web Service  Settings tab  gt   Machine Settings  gt
38.  has a B   you can select other printer drivers  connected to the selected printer     1  2  3  4 Select Printing preferences        Change the settings on each tab   5    6 Click OK     4  Special Features 229    Printing features    Using advanced print features    KU XPS printer driver  used to print XPS file format              e See  Features by model  on page 7     e The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or  higher     e For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website  http     www samsung com  gt  find your product gt  Support or downloads     Printing to a file  PRN        You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file     1 Check the Print to file box in the Print window                                General  Select Printer  4 P m r  Satus  Rat ree  Location   Comment   Page Range     A Number of copies  1  Selection Current Page  Pages Collate   Bint   cance   Apy                2 Click Print     3 Type in the destination path and the file name  and then click OK     For example  c  Temp file name     WA If you type in only the file name  the file is automatically saved in My  Documents  Documents and Settings  or Users  The saved folder may  differ  depending on your operating system or the application you are  using              4  Special Features 230    Printing features    Understanding special printer features       You can use advanced printing features when using your machine     To take advantage of the prin
39.  host name  see  Printing a  network configuration report  on page 183         5 The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update          Ifyou want to install Samsung s printer management tools  you need to             install them using the supplied software CD  see  From the Desktop  Screen  on page 304      e You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  Store  You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store   1 From Charms  select Search   2 Click Store   3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience   4 Click Install     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User     Installing the driver over the wireless network    From the Desktop Screen    KA If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  you cannot use the  installed driver from the Start screen        1 Turn on your computer  access point  and machine     2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive     If the installation window does not appear  from Charms  select Search   gt  Apps and search for Run  Type in X  Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK     A it    Tap to choose what happens with this disc     pop up window appears   click the window and select Run Setup exe              3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     4 Follow the instructions in the installation window     2 For wireless set up or driver installation  refer to the wireless 
40.  in tray  see   Loading paper in the  tray  on page 40      Suggested solutions    Check the IP address and  reset it if necessary  see    Message      BOOTP problem     Auto IP Run      DHCP problem   Auto IP Run    Meaning    There is a problem with the  network     Suggested solutions    Change the Auto IP        e BOOTP problem     Reconfigure  DHCP      DHCP problem     Reconfigure  DHCP    The IP address assignment is  failed  This happens  when  Auto IP for BOOTP DHCP is  set in SyncThru    Web  Service     Change the IP address  assignment method to  DHCP BOOTP or Static  If  you do not change this  option  the BOOTP DHCP  server continually asks to  assign the IP Address           IP Conflict  someone else   Printing a network  configuration report  on  page 148    Wireless Wireless module is not Reboot the power and try    Network Error       installed        the printing job again  If  the problem persists   please call for service     802 1x    Network Error       Fail to authenticate        Check the network  authentication protocol   If the problem persists   contact your network  administrator     4  Troubleshooting 110    j Understanding display messages    Misc  messages    Message    Adjusting Color    Registration    Meaning    The machine is adjusting the  color registration     Suggested solutions    Wait a few minutes        Calibrating    image density       The machine is calibrating  the image density     Wait a few minutes     Message    Error  error
41.  number     Install  color  toner    Meaning    The indicated toner  cartridge is installed  improperly  orthe connector  is polluted     Suggested solutions    Reinstall the Samsung   genuine toner cartridge  two or three times to  confirm it is seated  properly  Or clean the  connector  If the problem  persists  contact the  service representatives           Door Open    Close it    The cover is not securely  latched     Close the cover until it  locks into place     Error  error number     Turn off then on          Scan Unit Open  or Exit JAM    The scan unit is not securely  latched or paper has  jammed in the scanner area     Clear the jam  see   Clearing original  document jams  on  page 96      e Close the cover until it  locks into place     Error  error number     Call for service    The machine unit cannot be  controlled     Reboot the power and try  the printing job again  If  the problem persists   please call for service        Scanner Locked    The scanner is locked     Reboot the power  If the  problem persists  please  call for service           Door of scanner is  open        The cover of scanner is not  securely latched        Close the cover until it  locks into place     Install TR   belt unit     The transfer belt is not  installed     Install a Samsung   genuine transfer belt        Not compatible    transfer belt    The transfer belt of the  machine is not for your  machine     Install the a Samsung   genuine part designed  for your machine        Not i
42.  open the TCP   IP configuration window     Enter the machine   s new information into the configuration window  In  a corporate intranet  you may need to have this information assigned by  a network manager before proceeding     Find the machine   s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report   see  Printing a network configuration report  on page 148  and enter it  without the colons  For example  00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes  0015992951A8     Click Apply  and then click OK  The machine will automatically print the  Network Configuration Report  Confirm that all the settings are  correct     IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Linux        Before using the SetIP program  disable the computer firewall from System  Preferences or Administrator        A W N      A The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems     Open  opt Samsung mfp share utils     Double click the SetIPApplet html file    Click to open the TCP IP configuration window    Enter the machine   s new information into the configuration window  In    a corporate intranet  you may need to have this information assigned by  a network manager before proceeding     Find the machine   s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report   see  Printing a network configuration report  on page 148  and enter it  without the colons  For example  00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes  0015992951A8     The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration  Report     2  Using a Network Connected Machin
43.  printer wirelessly   While configuring the wireless settings for the printer  your Internet may be disconnected        Using a USB cable    Configure wireless settings to the printer through a USB connection                    lt Bak    Next gt     cancel                      After searching  the window shows the wireless network devices  Select  the name  SSID  of the access point you want to use and click Next     If you cannot find the network name you want to choose  or if you want to  set the wireless configuration manually  click Advanced Setting       Enter the wireless Network Name  Enter the SSID of the access point   SSID is case sensitive      e Operation Mode  Select Infrastructure     e Authentication  Select an authentication type   Open System  Authentication is not used  and encryption may or may  not be used  depending on the need for data security   Shared Key  Authentication is used  A device that has a proper WEP key  can access the network   WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal  Select this option to authenticate the  print server based on a WPA Pre Shared Key  This uses a shared secret key   generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase   which is manually  configured on the access point and each of its clients       Encryption  Select the encryption  None  WEP64  WEP128  TKIP  AES   TKIP AES      e Network Password  Enter the encryption network password value     e Confirm Network Password  Confirm the encryption network  password value     e WEP Key Index  If 
44.  printing  see  Features by model  on page 7         Printing files       You can print text  image  pdf files on your machine using the standard    CUPS directly from the command line interface  The CUPS Ip or lpr utility allows  you to do that  You can print these files by using below command format      Ip  d  lt printer name gt   o  lt option gt   lt file name gt      Please refer to Ip or lpr man page on your system for more details     4  Special Features 239    Printing features    Configuring Printer Properties       Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration   you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer     1    Open the Unified Driver Configurator     If necessary  switch to Printers configuration   Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties     The Printer Properties window appears   The following five tabs display at the top of the window     General  Allows you to change the printer location and name  The  name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers  configuration     Connection  Allows you to view or select another port  If you change  the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use  you  must re configure the machine port in this tab     Driver  Allows you to view or select another machine driver  By  clicking Options  you can set the default device options     Jobs  Shows the list of print jobs  Click Cancel job to cancel the  selected jo
45.  s guide     Quick links    Displays Quick links to machine specific functions  This  section also includes links to applications in the advanced  settings     If you connect your machine to a network  the  SyncThru    Web Service icon is enabled              Application  information          Includes links for changing to the advanced settings   preference  help  and about     2 The 72 button is used to change the user  interface to the advanced settings user interface   see  Advanced settings user interface overview   on page 269               Contents area    Displays information about the selected machine   remaining toner level  and paper  The information will vary  based on the machine selected  Some machines do not  have this feature        Order supplies          Click on the Order button from the supply ordering  window  You can order replacement toner cartridge s   from online     KA Select the Help menu and click on any option you want to know about        5  Useful Management Tools 268    Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager    Fax to PC Settings       Advanced settings user interface overview       This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected  The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible device   for managing thenetwork and machings  Disable  If Disable is On  incoming faxes will not be received on this device   Enable Fax Receiving from Device  Enables faxing on the device and allow  Some menus 
46.  seconds     When the Wi Fi network is in idle mode  The machine is immediately  disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off     When the Wi Fi network is being used  While the machine waits until the  current job is finished  the light blinks fast on the WPS LED  Then  the  wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS    LED turns off     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 165    Wireless network setup    Using the menu button    Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine       Before starting  you will need to know the network name  SSID  of your wireless  network and the network key if it is encrypted  This information was set when  the access point  or wireless router  was installed  If you do not know about your  wireless environment  please ask the person who set up your network     2 After completing the wireless network connection  you need to install a  machine driver to print from an application  see  Installing driver over the  network  on page 151           Press the   3   Menu  button on the control panel   2 Press Network  gt  Wireless  gt  WLAN Settings     3 Press the OK to select the setup method you want     Wizard  recommended   In this mode  the setup is automatic  The  machine will display a list of available networks from which to  choose  After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the  corresponding security key     Cust
47.  see  Troubleshooting  on page 276      If you cannot find a solution in the User s Guide or the problem persists  call for service        i Tips for avoiding paper jams    By selecting the correct medias  most paper jams can be avoided  To avoid paper jams  refer to the following guidelines   Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly  see  Tray overview  on page 39    Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing   Flex  fan  and straighten paper before loading   Do not use creased  damp  or highly curled paper   Do not mix papers in a tray     Use only recommended print media  see  Print media specifications  on page 117      4  Troubleshooting 95     Clearing original document jams    When an original document jams in the document feeder  a warning message appears on the display     A To avoid tearing the document  remove the jammed document slowly and carefully     a To prevent document jams  use the scanner glass for thick  thin or mixed paper  originals   si          4  Troubleshooting 96    Clearing original document jams          Original paper jam in front of scanner              Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20               e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Variety feature  on page 10                  4  Troubleshooting    Clearing original document jams    Or
48.  select Control Panel  gt  Hardware  and Sound  gt  Printers     e For Windows 7 8  select Control Panel  gt  Devices and Printers   e For Windows Server 2008 R2  select Control Panel  gt  Hardware  gt   Devices and Printers    c Right click your machine    d For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista  press Properties   For Windows 7 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2  from context menus   select the Printer properties   If Printer properties item has    mark  you can select other printer  drivers connected with selected printer    e Click Port tab    f Click Configure Port    button     g Check if Printer Name or IP Address  is the IP address on the network    configuration Sheet   3 Change the printer port s IP address if it is different from the network  information report s     If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP   connect to a network printer  Then reconnect the IP address     For a Static network environment    The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured  to static address     For example    If the computer s network information is as shown below       P address  169 254 133 42      Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0   Then the machine   s network information should be as below       P address  169 254 133 43       Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0  Use the computer s subnet mask      Gateway  169 254 133 1    2  Using a Network Connected Machine 189    Wireless network setup    Other problems   Check whether the access point  or wireless router  h
49.  set other settings useful for using the machine     See  Entering various characters  on page 225    See  Keypad letters and numbers  on page 225   See  Setting the paper size and type  on page 46   See  Setting up the fax address book  on page 226     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI     Media and tray    This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your  machine     a    e Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  problems or require repairs  Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s  warranty or service agreements     e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine  It could  cause damage to the machine     e Using inflammable print media can cause a fire     e Use designated print media  see  Print media specifications  on page  117      The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may  lead to overheating of the unit and  in rare cases may cause a fire     Tray overview    To change the size  you need to adjust the paper guides     Paper cover   Guide lock   Paper length guide  Paper width guide       hwWN      If you do not adjust the guide  it may cause paper registration  image skew   or jamming of the paper     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI    Media and tray    Open the paper cover   2    Loading paper in the tray       KU Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending  on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on  pa
50.  silent installation  Installs machine drivers  without prompting any Uls  or user intervention           2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive     3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     4 Select Network Connection on the Printer Connection Type screen     5 Follow the instructions in the installation window     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 151    Installing driver over the network    Command line     p    lt port name gt     or     P    lt port name gt        Definition    Specifies printer port     KU Network Port will be  created by use of  Standard TCP IP  Port monitor  For  local port  this port  must exist on  system before  being specified by  command              Description    Printer port name can be  specified as IP address   hostname  USB local port  name or IEEE1284 port  name     For example         P XXX XXX XXX XXX      N  where     XXxX XXX XXX XXX     means IP address for  network printer     p   USB001      P   LPT1         p   hostname       Command  line     nd or   ND    Definition    Commands not to set the  installed driver as a default  machine driver     Description    It indicates installed  machine driver will not be  the default machine driver  on your system if there are  one or more printer drivers  installed  If there is no  installed machine driver on  your system  then this  option won t be applied  because Windows OS will  set installed printer driver as  a
51.  supplies  accessories and maintenance parts available for your  machine     Ordering supplies and accessories  Available supplies   Available maintenance parts  Storing the toner cartridge  Redistributing toner   Replacing the toner cartridge  Replacing the waste toner container  Monitoring the supplies life   Setting the toner low alert   Cleaning the machine    Tips for moving  amp  storing your machine         Ordering supplies and accessories    2 Available accessories may differ from country to country  Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies  and maintenance parts        To order Samsung authorized supplies  accessories  and maintenance parts  contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine   You can also visit www samsung com supplies  and then select your country region to obtain the contact information for service     3  Maintenance    Available supplies    When supplies reach the end of their life spans  you can order the followings of supplies for your machine     Type Average yield  Part name    Toner cartridge e Average continuous black cartridge yield  Approx  1 500 standard pages  Black  e K406  CLT K406S   Black  C406  CLT C406S   Cyan   e M406  CLT M406S   Magenta  e Y406  CLT Y406S   Yellow    e Average continuous color cartridge yield  Approx  1 000 standard pages  Yellow Magenta Cyan        Imaging unit Approx  16 000 images    CLT R406          Waste toner container Approx  7 000 imag
52.  sure your machine supports wireless networking  Wireless  networking may not be available depending on the model  see  Features  by model  on page 7         If the IPv6 network seems to not be working  set all the network settings  to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting     Understanding your network type       Typically  you can only have one connection between your computer and the  machine at a time     Infrastructure mode       This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs   Small Office  Home Office   This mode uses an access point to       NY  mmm communicate with the wireless machine   a  Ad hoc mode  S Gy  This mode does not use an access point  The wireless  NI    gam computer and wireless machine communicate directly                    Wireless network name and network password       Wireless networks require higher security  so when an access point is first set up   a network name  SSID   the type of security used  and a Network Password are  created for the network  Ask your network administrator about this information  before proceeding with the machine installation     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 159    Wireless network setup    Introducing wireless set up methods       You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer  Choose the setting method from the below table        Set up method    With Access Point    Connecting method    From the computer       2 Some wireless network installation types may n
53.  the imaging unit  on page 85      Thoroughly redistribute the toner  see  Redistributing toner  on page 79         Toner smear    AaBbCc  AaBhCc  AaBhCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc                Clean the inside of the machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89    e Check the paper type and quality     e Remove the imaging unit and install a new one  see  Replacing the imaging unit  on page 85      6  Troubleshooting 285    Printing quality problems             Condition Suggested solutions   Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals   ress    e The imaging unit may be damaged  If you still have the same problem  remove the imaging unit and  install a new one  see  AaBbCc  Replacing the imaging unit  on page 85     AaBbC Ch e Parts of the machine may have toner on them  If the defects occur on the back of the page  the problem will likely correct itself after  AaBbCc a few more pages    AaBbCc_ l       LA e The fusing assembly may be damaged  Contact a service representative   AaBbCc  Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page     e The paper may be too damp  Try printing with a different batch of paper  Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that  the paper does not absorb too much moisture        e Ifbackground scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page  adjust the print resolution through your software application  orin Printing Pr
54.  to produce  a booklet                                   S             Booklet Printing    2   This option is available only when you use the PCL SPL printer driver  This option is not available when you use XPS driver        e The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes  Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what  paper sizes are available        e Ifyou select an unavailable paper size  this option can be automatically canceled  Select only available paper  paper without 4 or g  mark         4  Special Features 232    Printing features    Item    Double sided  Printing  Manual     Print on both sides of a sheet of paper  duplex   Before printing  decide how you want your document oriented        e Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the duplex option     e None  Disables this feature     Description      Long Edge  This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding                                     Short Edge  This option is the conventional layout used in calendars                                   KA e This option is available only when you use the PCL SPL printer driver  This option is not available when you use XPS driver     If your machine does not have a duplex unit  you should complete the printing job manually  The machine prints every other page of  the document first  After that  a message appears on your computer        Paper Options          Iris                         Changes the si
55.  you call for  service or register as a user on the Samsung website  you  can find this        Shows the supply life indicators  see  Monitoring the    Supplies Life it eed  PP supplies life  on page 87   TonerLow Alert          Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty   see  Setting the toner low alert  on page 88      3  Useful Setting Menus 220    Network setup       Option    Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or    models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on    page 31      Option    TCP IP  IPv4     Press 12  Menu  gt  Network on the control panel     Description    Selects the appropriate protocol and configure  parameters to use the network environment     Protocol Mgr   There are lots of parameters to be set  If you are g    not sure  leave as is  or consult the network  administrator           TCP IP  IPv6     Selects this option to use the network environment  through IPv6  see  IPv6 configuration  on page 156         Ethernet Speed    Configure the network transmission speed        Wireless    Selects this option to use the wireless network        Clear Setting    Reverts the network settings to the default values    Reboot required         Network Conf        This list shows information on your machine   s network  connection and configuration        Description    You can activate or deactivate the following protocols       Net  Activate  You can set whether to use Ethernet on  or off     A
56. 00 614 40 www samsung com   support  MONGOLIA 7 495 363 17 00 www samsung com   support  MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www samsung com   support  MOROCCO 080 100 2255 NANA samsung  conn  n_africa support  MOZAMBIQUE 847267864   827267864 www samsung com   support  MYANMAR 01 2399888 www samsung com   support  NAMIBIA 08 197 267 864 www samsung com   support  NIGERIA 0800 726 7864 wow samsung can  africa_en support  NETHERLANDS OOS ANGUNE  0900 7267864    www samsung com   NEW ZEALAND 0800 726 786 www samsung com           nz support    PANAMA       800 7267  800 0101       www samsung com   latin support   Spanish     www samsung com   latin_en support   English     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 324     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    009 800 542 0001    WebSite    www samsung com   latin support    Country Region    Customer Care Center    1 800 682 3180    WebSite    www samsung com   latin support                                         Spanish   Spanish   PARAGUAY PUERTO RICO  www samsung com  www samsung com   latin_en support latin_en support   English   English   PERU 0 800 777 08 www samsung com  800 CALL  800 2255  www samsung com   pe support ae support  English   QATAR  1 800 10 7267864  PLDT  www samsung com  www samsung com   ae ar support  Arabic  PEE 1 800 8 7267864  Globe landline   Ph support    PP PAO  Mobil   f  and Mobile  RWANDA 9999 www samsung com   02 4222111  Other landline  support  0 801 172 678  lub  48 22 607  www samsu
57. 2 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB  2 GB  16 GB            Support for DirectX   9 graphics with 128 MB memory  to enable the Aero theme        DVD R W Drive       5  Appendix 120    Specifications      Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems        e Users who have administrator rights can install the software     e Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine     Mac       Requirements  Recommended   Operating system          CPU RAM Free HDD space  Mac OS X 10 5   Intel   processors 512 MB  1 GB  1 GB    867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5  Mac OS X 10 6   Intel   processors 1 GB  2 GB  1 GB  Mac OS X 10 7   10 9   Intel   processors 2 GB 4 GB             5  Appendix 121    Specifications    Linux       Items    Requirements    Operating system    Redhat   Enterprise Linux WS 4  5  6  32 64 bit    Fedora 5   15  32 64 bit    OpenSuSE   10 2  10 3  11 0  11 1  11 2  11 3  11 4  32 64 bit    Mandriva 2007  2008  2009  2009 1  2010  32 64 bit    Ubuntu 6 06  6 10  7 04  7 10  8 04  8 10  9 04  9 10  10 04  10 10  11 04  32 64 bit   SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10  11  32 64 bit    Debian 4 0  5 0  6 0  32 64 bit              CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz  Intel Core   2   RAM 512 MB  1 GB   Free HDD space 1 GB  2 GB        5  Appendix 122    Network environment       KU Network and wireless models only  see  Features by model  on page 7               You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it
58. 237  O  output support 47  overlay printing  create 235  delete 236  print 236  P  placing a machine  adjusting the altitude 224    Index ga    Index    postScript driver  troubleshooting  preparing originals type  print  general setup  mobile OS  print media  card stock  labels  output support  preprinted paper  setting the paper size  print menu  printer preferences  Linux  printer status  general information    printing    changing the default print settings    Linux  Mac    299  48    205  192    45  45  117  46   46  44  205    240    271    229    239  237    multiple pages on one sheet of paper    Mac  printing a document    237          Windows 52  Mac 238  230  setting as a default machine 229  231  USB memory 71  printing a document  Linux 239  Mac 237  printing feature 229  problem  operating system problems 295  problems  copying problems 291  faxing problems 293  paper feeding problems 277  278  279  283  scanning problems 292  R  rear view 22  regulatiory information 124  reports  machine information 206  209  210  211   215  216  219  resolution    faxing 67  S  safety   information 14   symbols 14  samsung printer experience 310  Samsung Printer Status 271  scan   general setup 213  Scan Assitant 246  scan feature 241    Scanning    Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 246    scanning  basic information  Linux scanning  Mac scanning    241  248  247    Scanning from image editing program 245     242    USB flash memory  service contact numbers  SetIP program  S
59. 5 500 www samsung com   support  TAIWAN 0800 329999 www samsung com   tw support  TANZANIA 0800 755 755 www samsung com   support  THAILAND 0 2689 3232  www samsung com   1800 29 3232 th support  1 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com   latin support  TRINIDAD  amp   Spanish   NO BRS www samsung com   latin_en support   English   TURKEY 4447711 www samsung com   tr support  TUNISIA 80 1000 12 www samsung com           n_africa support    Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 326     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Customer Care Center    8 10 800 500 55 500    WebSite    www samsung com   support          0 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864     www samsung com   ve support          1800 588 889    www samsung com   vn support          Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region  800 SAMSUNG  800  726 7864  ae UZBEKISTAN   U A E   www samsung com    ae_ar support  Arabic  VENEZUELA  UK 0330 SAMSUNG  7267864  www samsung com    uk support VIETNAM  U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com    Consummer us support ZAMBIA  Electonics  U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG  72 6786  www samsung com      Mobile Phones      HHP  1 888 987 HELP 4357     us support       UGANDA    0800 300 300    www samsung com   support       UKRAINE    0 800 502 000    www samsung com   ua support  Ukrainian     www samsung com   ua_ru support   Russian        URUGUAY          000  405 437 33       www samsung com   latin support Spanish     www samsung com   latin_en   support English           0211 350370       www sams
60. 7       1  Introduction    This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine     Key benefits   Features by model  Useful to know   About this user   s guide    Safety information    Machine overview   Control panel overview  Turning on the machine  Installing the driver locally  Reinstalling the driver       Key benefits    Environmentally friendly    To save toner and paper  this machine supports Eco feature  see  Eco  printing  on page 56      To save paper  you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper   see  Using advanced print features  on page 230      To save paper  you can print on both sides of the paper  double sided  printing   Manual   see  Using advanced print features  on page 230      To save electricity  this machine automatically conserves electricity by  substantially reducing power consumption when not in use     We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy   Fast high resolution printing    a    a    e Youcan printin a full range of colors using cyan  magenta  yellow  and black     e You can print with a resolution of up to 2 400 x 600 dpi effective output  600  x 600 x 2 bit        Fast  on demand printing     For single side black and white printing  up to 18 ppm  A4  or up to 19  ppm  Letter      For single side color printing  up to 4 ppm  A4 or Letter      Convenience    Simply touch your cell phone on the NFC tag on your printer and get the  print job done  see  Using the NFC feature  on page 193      Yo
61. 7  iaon 25 easy document creator 270 preparing to fax 64  numeric keypad 26 Ee AVEN an receiving in Fax mode 67  scan to 23 eco planing 36 features 5  wps 23  25 entering character 225 machine features 203     error message 107 print media feature 117  F front view 20  cleaning  inside 90 favorites settings  for printing 55 G       outside 89 fax general icons 13       Index                   general settings 215  glossary 328  google cloud printing 200  l  id copy 61  installation  accessories 318  J  jam  clearing original document 96  101  tips for avoiding paper jams 95  L  LCD display  browsing the machine status 206  207  209   214  219  Linux  common Linux problems 297  driver installation for network connected  154  144  145  printer properties 240  239  scanning 248  unifled driver configurator 273  150    linux scanning 248  loading  paper in the tray1 40  special media 44  loading originals 48  M  Mac  common Mac problems 296  driver installation for network connected  153  142  143  printing 237  scanning 247  121  using SetIP 149  mac scanning 247    machine information 206  207  209  214  219  machine setup   machine status 206  207  209  214  219  maintenance parts 77  menu overview 31  multi purpose tray    using special media 44          N  network  driver installation  Linux 154  Mac 153  Windows 151  general setup 221  installing environment 123  147  IPv6 configuration 156  SetIP program 148  149  150  183  wired network setup 148  159  n up printing  Mac 
62. Date  amp  Time  When you set the time and date  they are used in delay  fax and delay print  They are printed on reports  If  however  they are  not correct  you need to change it for the correct time being     Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad  see   Keypad letters and numbers  on page 225      Month   01 to 12   Day   01 to 31   Year   requires four digits  Hour   01 to 12   Minute   00 to 59    Clock Mode  You can set your machine to display the current time  using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format     Power Save  When you are not using the machine for a while  use  this feature to save power     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup      Machine s basic settings    2 a       When you press the Power Wakeup button  start printing  or a fax is  received  the product will wake up from the power saving mode     Press KE  Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Machine Setup  gt  Wakeup Event     gt  On on the control panel  When you press any button except Power   Wakeup button  the machine wake up from the power save mode     Altitude Adj   Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure   which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the  machine above sea level  Before you set the altitude value     determine the altitude where you are  see  Altitude adjustment  on  page 224      Select the option you want  then press OK     Press OK to save the selection        4   5   6 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode   2    Refer to below links to
63. Document is synonymous with original   Paper is synonymous with media  or print media     Machine refers to printer or MFP     General icons       Icon Text Description  i Gives users information to protect the machine from  A Caution possible mechanical damage or malfunction   Provides additional information or detailed  a Note                   specification of the machine function and feature     1  Introduction E    Safety information    These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and   others  and to prevent any potential damage to your machine  Be sure to read Operating environment  and understand all of these instructions before using the machine  After reading  this section  keep it in a safe place for future reference                                      A Warning  Important safety symbols vo  O Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is     CI not grounded   e e e e e     Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire   8 Do not place anything on top of the machine  water  small metal or     lt   ng heavy objects  candles  lit cigarettes  etc     Warnin Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe CAI  A g personal injury or death  This could result in electric shock or fire    a O  e Ifthe machine gets overheated  it releases smoke  makes  Gainion Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor 464 strange noises  or generates an odd odor  immedia
64. Experience                         Security tab Using the sharing feature       Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications    i i h   ions  If f f a  Some features may not be available depending on the model or options installed on the computer using the sharing feature     this tab is not shown or disabled  it means that these features are not  supported        WA This feature is only available for printing jpeg  bmp  tiff  gif  and png file  formats                 Samsung Printer Experience    babad Select the content you want to print from other application     From the Charms  select Share 5 Samsung Printer Experience    Select the printer settings  such as the number of copies and orientation     Click the Print button to start the print job     A W N         Job Accounting  This option allows you to print with the given permission   Confidential Printing    This option is used for printing confidential documents  You need to enter a  password to print using it     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 315    Using Samsung Printer Experience    7 Click Scan a and save the image     Scanning from Windows 8    KA This section is for the users with multi functional printers  available     a    Ly   Whenyou place the originals in the ADF  or DADF   Prescan  lt Q  isnot          e You can skip step 5  if the Prescan option is selected     Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that  can be stored on your computer   
65. If the message appears in ready  mode or after printing has completed  check the connection and or whether an error has occurred     2 Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages     6  Troubleshooting 295     Operating system problems       Condition    The machine does not print PDF files  correctly  Some parts of graphics  text  or  illustrations are missing     Suggested solutions    Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print  Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options     KA It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image                 Some letters are not displayed normally  during cover page printing     Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page  The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on  the cover page        When printing a document in Mac with  Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher  colors  print incorrectly                 Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader     KU Refer to the Mac User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages     6  Troubleshooting 296    Operating system problems    Common Linux problems    Condition Suggested solutions          Check if the printer driver is installed in your system  Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers  configuration window to lo
66. Implementers Forum  Inc   to connect computers and peripherals  Unlike the  parallel port  USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB  port to multiple peripherals        A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter  when viewed by transmitted light  Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna   Italy in 1282  they have been used by papermakers to identify their product  and  also on postage stamps  currency  and other government documents to  discourage counterfeiting     WEP       Wired Equivalent Privacy  WEP  is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to  provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN  WEP provides security  by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one  end point to another     WIA       Windows Imaging Architecture  WIA  is an imaging architecture that is originally  introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP  A scan can be initiated from within  these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner     WPA       Wi Fi Protected Access  WPA  is a class of systems to secure wireless  Wi Fi   computer networks  which was created to improve upon the security features of  WEP     Glossary 338    Glossary    WPA PSK       WPA PSK  WPA Pre Shared Key  is special mode of WPA for small business or  home users  A shared key  or password  is configured in the wireless access point   WAP  and any wireless laptop or desktop devices  WPA PSK generates a unique  k
67. Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters  see  Keypad letters and numbers  on page 225     10 Address Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers  see  Setting up the fax address book  on page 226    Book   11 Redial Pause    Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode  or inserts a pause    into a fax number in edit mode  see  Redialing   the fax number  on page 250     12 Stops an operations at any time   Stop Clear j i y   13   Power  Turns the power on or off  or wakes up the machine from the power save mode  If you need to turn the machine off  press this button for  Wakeup more than three seconds when the machine is in ready mode    14 Start D Starts a job    15 On Hook Dial O When you press this button  you can hear a dial tone  Then enter a fax number  It is similar to making a call using speaker phone  see    Receiving manually in Tel mode  on page 255     16 Sends you back to the upper menu level   Back Kk  4 EP   17 Switches to Scan mode   Scan   18 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine  see  Understanding the status LED  on page 105     19 Eco Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc printing and copying only  see  Eco printing  on page 56     20 Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine           1  Introduction 26     Turning on the mac
68. Print   Enter your printer   s name and description     Click Register     The confirmation pop up window appears     If you set the browser to block pop ups  the confirmation window will not  appear  Allow the site to show pop ups     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 200    Google Cloud Print    10 Click Finish printer registration     11 Click Manage your printers     Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service     Google Cloud Print ready devices will appear in the list     Printing with Google Cloud Print    The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you  are using  You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print  service     KU Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless  network that has access to the Internet              Printing from an application on mobile device       The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Android  mobile phone     1 Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device     2 If you do not have the application  download it from the application store  such as Android Market or App Store        2 Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device   3 Tap the option button of the document that you want to print   4 Tap the send b  button     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 201    Google Cloud Print    5    6    7    Tap the Cloud Print    button   Set the printing options if you want     Tap Click here to P
69. Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd  All rights reserved    This user   s guide is provided for information purposes only  All information included herein is subject to change without notice    Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages  arising from or related to use of this user   s guide   Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd     Microsoft  Windows  Windows Vista  Windows 7  Windows 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  Corporation     Google  Picasa  Google Docs  Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc   Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc     iPad  iPhone  iPod touch  Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc   registered in the U S and other countries  AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks  of Apple Inc     All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations     Refer to the  LICENSE txt  file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information     REV  9 01    5  Appendix    User s Guide    Samsung Printer Xpress    C46x series    ADVANCED    This guide provides information about installation  advanced configuration   operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments     Some features may not be available depending on models or countries     BASIC    This guide provides information concerning installation  basic operation and troubleshoo
70. Service    2 e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for  SyncThru    Web Service        e SyncThru    Web Service explanation in this user s guide may differ from  your machine depending on its options or models     e Network model only  see  Variety feature  on page 10      Accessing SyncThru    Web Service       1 Access a web browser  such as Internet Explorer  from Windows     Enter the machine IP address of your printer  http   xxx XXX Xxx xxXx  in  the address field and press the Enter key or click Go     2 Your machine s embedded website opens     Logging into SyncThru   Web Service       Before configuring options in SyncThru   Web Service  you need to log in as an  administrator  You can still use SyncThru   Web Service without logging in but  you won t have access to Settings tab and Security tab     Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru    Web Service website     If it   s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to  log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and Password   We recommend you to change the default password for security  reasons     ID  admin    Password  sec00000    5  Useful Management Tools 264    Using SyncThru    Web Service    SyncThru    Web Service overview       Maintenance    A Information    Settings Security       2 Some tabs may not appear depending on your model        Information tab       This tab gives you general information about your machine  You can check  things  s
71. Stateless Address  Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network IPv6  We recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6  see  Installing  router  driver over the network  on page 151      Stateful Address  IPv6 address configured by a DHCPV6 server     Manual Address  Manually configured IPv6 address by a user     DHCPv6 address configuration       In the IPv6 network environment  follow the next procedure to use the IPv6    address  If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network  you can set one of the following    options for default dynamic host configuration        Press the KEI  Menu  button on the control panel     2 Press Network  gt  TCP IP  IPv6   gt  DHCPv6 Config     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 156    IPv6 configuration    3 Press OK to select the required value you want   DHCPv6 Addr   Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request   DHCPv6 Off  Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request     Router  Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router     From the SyncThru    Web Service       Activating IPv6       1 Access a web browser  such as Internet Explorer  from Windows  Enter  the machine IP address  http   xxx xxx xxx xxX  in the address field and  press the Enter key or click Go     2 If it   s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to  log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and password   We recommend you to change the default password for security  reasons     ID  admin  Password  sec00000  3 When the SyncThru
72. This is only available for printers that support wireless networking      E  Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer                  lt Back    next gt    cancel         On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time  screen  select  Yes  I will set up my printer s wireless network  Then  click Next     If your printer is already connected on the network  select No  my  printer is already connected to my network     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    6 Select Using a direct wireless connection on the Select the Wireless If below screen appears  press the g   WPS  button from the control  Setup Method screen  Then  click Next  panel within 2 minutes        1  Wekome    2  Connecting Printers Select the Wireless Setup Method Press WPS button on your printer    2  Connecting Printers  3  Select Sof  per4 ann Setup will configure wireless settings for the printer now  To use your printer in a wireless network environment  you must configure the wireless network settings of the  printer to communicate with your network access point or router     3  Select Software  Please select a method to configure the wireless settings from the options below  _    4  Installation For accessing the printer securely  Setup requres your confrmation  Please press WPS button on your printer     5  Finish       Using a direct wireless connection  Configure wireless settings for the printer through a drect wireless connection
73. UPS server break the print  job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning  Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port  while printing  the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs  If this situation  occurs  try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window        The machine does not appear  on the scanners list     e Ensure your machine is attached to your computer  connected properly via the USB port  and is turned on     e Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system  Open Unified Linux Driver configurator  switch to Scanners  configuration  then press Drivers  Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window     e Ensure the port is not busy  Since functional components of machine  printer and scanner  share the same I O interface  port   the  situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible  To avoid possible conflicts  only one of  them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device  The other user will encounter    device busy    response  This usually happens  when starting a scan procedure  An appropriate message box appears    To identify the source of the problem  open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner  port s symbol  dev   mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the sca
74. Up  ID Copy    Copy Feature  Adjust Bkgd   Off  Auto  Enhance Lev 1  Enhance Lev 2    Erase Lev 1  Erase Lev 4          Copy Setup   Change Default   Original Size   Copies   Copy Collation   Reduce Enlarge   Darkness   Original Type   Adjust Bkgd     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 33     Menu overview    Scan Feature    USB Feature  Original Size  Original Type  Resolution  Color Mode  File Format    Darkness       Scan Setup  Change Default  USB Default       Orientation  Portrait  Landscape   Copies   1   999    Resolution  Normal  Best   Trapping  Off  Normal  Maximum   Document Type  Standard  Photo  Biz Graphic  CAD  Web Page    Print Setup  Screen  Enhance  Detailed  Normal  Clear Text  Off  Minimum  Normal  Maximum  Auto CR  LF  LF  CR  Emulation  Emulation Type    Setup       2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 3a     Menu overview    System Setup  Machine Setup Paper Setup Report Maintenance   Machine ID  Paper Size Configuration CLR Empty Msg      Fax Number  Paper Type Supplies Info  Supplies Life   Margin Demo Page  Date  amp  Time  g g Image Mgr    Sound Volume  Address Book  Custom Color   Clock Mode    Key Sound Fax Confirm   Tone Adjust   Language   Alarm Sound Serial Number  Power Save Fax Sent    Speaker NG TonerLow Alert  Auto Power Off  Fax Received   Ringer  Wakeup Event Schedule Jobs     System Timeout Junk Fax   Job Timeout Network Conf   Altitude Adj  Usage Counter  Humidity Fax Options     Auto Continue  Paper Substit   PrintBlankPage  Eco Settings   
75. User s Guide    Samsung Printer Xpress    C46x series    BASIC    This guide provides information concerning the installation  basic operation  and troubleshooting on windows     ADVANCED    This guide provides information about the installation  advanced configuration  operation  and troubleshooting on various OS environments   Some features may not be available depending on models or countries     BASIC          Basic faxing 64  1  Introduction Using USB memory device 69  Key benefits 5 Mai  Features by model 7   3  aintenanig  PEETULAO KNOW 1a Ordering supplies and accessories 75  About this user   s guide 13 R     j i Available supplies 76  aes MaN ON 14 Available maintenance parts 77  ha ena   1a Storing the toner cartridge 78  une pane Apn   Redistributing toner 79  Naming onthe marnine a Replacing the toner cartridge 81  Installing the driver locally 28   a   Replacing the waste toner container 83  Reinstalling the driver 29     a    Replacing the imaging unit 85    Monitoring the supplies life 87  89    Cleaning the machine    MENWOYEFYIEW ai Tips for moving  amp  storing your machine 93  Machine   s basic settings 37  Media and tray 39  Basic printing 52  Basic copying 58    Basic scanning 63       BASIC    4  Troubleshooting       Tips for avoiding paper jams 95  Clearing original document jams 96  Clearing paper jams 101  Understanding the status LED 105  Understanding display messages 107  5  Appendix  Specifications 115  Regulatory information 124    Copyright 13
76. a    Secure Printing  This favorite enables you to print as confidential in print mode   A Currently connected printer doesn t support this feature  ra   elete Options       F e You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing  see    e You can check the machine s current status pressing the Printer Status  button  see  Using Samsung Printer Status  on page 271      2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup ET    Basic printing    Using a favorite setting  KA To use a saved setting  select it in the Favorites tab  The machine is now set    to print according to the settings you have selected                 The Favorites option  which is visible on each preferences tab except for the    Samsung tab  allows you to save the current preferences for future use  To delete saved settings  select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete     To save a Favorites item  follow these steps     2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box   Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and         Favorites  press F1 on your keyboard   Orientation  x       Landscape  Layout Options  x    Layout  Poster Printing  Post  3 Click Save     4 Enter name and description  and then select the desired icon     5 Click OK  When you save Favorites  all current driver settings are saved     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 155    Basic printing    Setting Eco mode on the control panel       Eco printing  1 Select KE  Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Machine Setup 
77. achine is connected via  USB cable        Device List  amp   Latest Scanned  Image          The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung  Printer Experience  Under the device  you can see the  latest scanned images  Your machine needs to be  connected to a network to scan from here     This section is for the users with multi functional  printers     Adding Deleting Printers       If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience  or if  you want to add delete a printer  follow the instructions below     2 You can only add delete network connected printers        Adding a printer       1 From the Charms  select Settings     Or  right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select  Settings     2 Select Add Printer    3 Select the printer you want to add     You can see the added printer         gt  Ifyou see mark  you can also click mark to add printers           Quick Guide for Windows 8 User aaa    Using Samsung Printer Experience    Deleting a printer       1 From the Charms  select Settings     Or  right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select  Settings     2 Select Remove Printer  3 Select the printer you want to delete     4 Click Yes     You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen     Printing from Windows 8    This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen     Basic printing       1  2  3  4    Open the document to print   From the Charms  select Devices   Select your printer from t
78. achine warranty does  not cover damage caused by user s misuse     1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine     2 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the    e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  and password settings  your machine may not automatically detect it  page 48     For details about these features  see the user s guide of the USB memory    device   Ei 3 Select  scan   gt  Scan To USB  gt  OK on the control panel     The machine begins scanning     To scan multiple pages  select Yes while Another Page  Yes No appears  After  scanning is complete  you can remove the USB memory device from the  machine     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    Using USB memory device    Customizing Scan to USB       You can specify image size  file format  or color mode for each scanning to USB  job     1 Select 9 scan   gt  i  Menu   gt  Scan Feature  gt  USB Feature on the  control panel   2 Select the setting option you want appears   Original Size  Sets the image size   Original Type  Sets the original document s   Resolution  Sets the image resolution     Color Mode  Sets the color mode  If you select Mono in this option   you cannot select JPEG in File Format     File Format  Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved  If    you select JPEG in this option  you cannot select Mono in Color  Mode     Darkness
79. adaptor  Do not remove the moulded    plug     A If you cut off the moulded plug  get rid of it straight away     You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you  plug it into a socket     Important warning        You must earth this machine       The wires in the mains lead have the following color code   Green and Yellow  Earth  Blue  Neutral  Brown  Live    If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug  do  the following     You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter    E     or by the safety    Earth symbol    or colored green and yellow or green     You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter    N    or  colored black     You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter    L     or colored red     You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug  adaptor  or at the distribution board     5  Appendix 132    Regulatory information    Declaration of conformity  European countries     Approvals and Certifications       Hereby  Samsung Electronics  declares that this  ProXpress  M332xND  ProXpress M382xD  ProXpress M382xND  ProXpress  M402xND  is in compliance with the essential requirements and  other relevant provisions of Low Voltage Directive  2006 95 EC    EMC Directive  2004 108 EC      CE    Hereby  Samsung Electronics  declares that this  ProXpress  M382xDW  is in compliance with the essential requirements and  other relevant provisions o
80. ae_ar support  Arabic   PAJUN TAPADA Pea 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com   KYRGYZSTAN  IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com  kz_ru support  iran support LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com   800 SAMSUNG  800 7267864  www samsung com  lv support  ITALIA  HHP  800 Msamsung Support LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com    800 67267864  It support  1 800 234 7267 www samsung com  LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com   JAMAICA 1 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  latin_en support support   English   MACAU 0800 333 www samsung com   JAPAN 0120 363 905 www samsung com  support  jp support  MACEDONIA 023 207 777  0800 22273 www samsung com   JORDAN PET levant support 1800 88 9999 www samsung com    English  MALAYSIA 603 77137477  Overseas my support  contact   KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500  GSM 7799    www samsung com   VIP care 7700  support MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com           mx support       Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 323    i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    WebSite          Country Region    NICARAGUA    Customer Care Center    001 800 5077267    WebSite    www samsung com   latin support Spanish     www samsung com   latin_en support   English           NORWAY    815 56480    www samsung com   no support             OMAN    800 SAMSUNG  800   726 7864     www samsung com   ae support  English     www samsung com   ae_ar support  Arabic           PAKISTAN    0800 Samsung  72678     www samsung com   pk support                MOLDOVA 0 8
81. age prints    The print job may not be PostScript     Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job  Check to see whether the software  application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine        The optional tray is not  selected in the driver    The printer driver has not been configured to  recognize the optional tray     Open the driver properties  select the Device Options tab  and set the tray option        When printing a document in  Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or  higher  colors print incorrectly       The resolution setting in the printer driver may    not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader        Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in  Acrobat Reader     6  Troubleshooting 299    Quick Guide for Windows 8  User    This chapter will outline features specific to the Windows 8 OS  This chapter applies to users running Windows 8     Understanding the screen 301  System requirements 302  Installing the driver locally 303  Installing the driver over the network 305  Installing the driver over the wireless network 307  Uninstalling the driver 309  Using Samsung Printer Experience 310  Accessing management tools 317  Installing accessories 318  Troubleshooting 319    r      The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or interface in use              e Since this guide has been prepared based on Windows 8  some of the instructions may differ  depending on the version  It may a
82. and reduces these problems     A                   To prevent damage to the imaging unit  do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes  Cover it with a piece of paper  if necessary   Do not touch the green area of the imaging unit  Use the handle on the imaging unit to avoid touching this area     Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine  be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts  Do not use solvents such  as benzene or thinner  Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine     Use a dry lint free cloth to clean the machine     Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord  Wait for the machine to cool down  If your machine has a power switch  turn the power switch off before  cleaning the machine     Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20      When opening a scan unit  hold the document feeder and scan unit together     3  Maintenance EJ    AYA    I ka NG  O d  N TA  WAP  Nx  Wr    7    Ca          J Cleaning the machine                3  Maintenance    Cleaning the machine    3 Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry     Cleaning the scan unit    Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies  We suggest  that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as 1  needed     2 e Turn the machine off and unplug the power co
83. anned image onto  Basic scanning method a USB memory device     This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Variety feature  on page 10          Samsung Easy Document Creator  You can use this program to scan  images or documents  See  Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  on  page 270         You can scan the originals with your machine via a USB cable or the network  The  following methodologies can be used for scanning your documents       Scan to PC  Scan the originals from the control panel  Then  the scanned  data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder  see   Basic Scanning  on page 63      4  Special Features g    Scan features    Setting the scan settings in the computer          5    This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Features by model  on page 7      Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager  see  Using Samsung Easy  Printer Manager  on page 267      Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List   Select Scan to PC Settings menu     Select the option you want     Scan Activation  Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on  the device     Basic tab  Contains settings related to general scan and device  settings     Image tab  Contains settings related to image altering     Press Save  gt  OK     Scanning from network connected machine    KU This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the       network interface  see  Rear view  on page 22   
84. anning  Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures     Document Scanning  Use for scanning documents with text or text and  images     Text Converting  Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an  editable text format     Book Scanning  Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner     SNS Upload  Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or  existing images to a variety of social networking sites  SNS      E Book Conversion  Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as  one e book or convert existing files into an e book format     Plug in  Scan  fax  and convert to E Book directly from the Microsoft Office  program     Click the Help  2  button from the window and click on any option you  want to know about        5  Useful Management Tools    Using Samsung Printer Status       The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the  machine status  Icon Mean Description       m Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no            The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s ihe    y guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use   i Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in  e Check the operating system s  that are compatible with your machine the future  For example  it might be in toner low status    see  Specifications  on page 115   which may lead to toner empty status                    e Available for Windows OS users only  se
85. ard may not be available  For some countries  only 802 11 b g can be applied  Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you  bought your machine     b  Windows only    e  Included  Blank  Not available        Features by model    Features    C46xFW       Multi send       Delay send       Priority send       Secure receive       Send  Receive forward   fax       Scan to PC       ID card copying       Reduced or enlarged copying       Collation       2 up 4 up       Adjust background                    e  Included  Blank  Not available           Useful to know    The machine does not print     Open the print queue list and remove the document from the  list  see  Canceling a print job  on page 53      Remove the driver and install it again  see  Installing the driver  locally  on page 28      Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows     see  Setting your machine as a default machine  on page 229      Where can I purchase accessories or supplies     Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer     Visit www samsung com supplies  Select your country region  to view product service information     The status LED flashes or remains constantly on     Turn the product off and on again     Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and  troubleshoot accordingly  see  Understanding the status LED   on page 105      A paper jam has occurred     Open and close the scan unit  see  Front view  on page 20      Check the instructions on removin
86. as a configured  security  password   If it has a password  refer to the access point  or wireless  router  administrator        If problems occur while using the machine on a network  check the following     e Checkthe machine s IP address  Reinstall the machine driver and change the  settings to connect to the machine on the network  Due to the  characteristics of DHCP  the allocated IP address could change if the  machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset     For information on the access point  or wireless router   refer to its own  user s guide     Register the product s MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on  the access point  or wireless router   Then you can always use the IP address    Your computer  access point  or wireless router   or machine may not be that is set with the MAC address  You can identify the Mac address of your  turned on  machine by printing a network configuration report  see  Printing a network  configuration report  on page 148      e You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time     e Check the wireless reception around the machine  If the router is far from    the machine or there is an obstacle  you might have difficulty receiving the      Check the wireless environment  You might not be able to connect to the  signal  network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a    user s information before connecting to the access point  or wireless router    e Cycle the p
87. as reached its       Average yield        Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts  see table below  The purpose of which  is to maintain your machine in top working condition  The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met     Parts    Fuser unit    Average yield       Approx  20 000 black pages or 5 000 color pages       Transfer roller    Approx  20 000 pages       Feed roller    Approx  20 000 pages       Pickup roller    Approx  20 000 pages       Intermediate Transfer Belt  ITB     Approx  20 000 pages for black and white mode or 5 000 pages for color mode       ADF Feed roller       Approx  20 000 pages       ADF Rubber Pad        Approx  20 000 pages    a  It will be affected by the operating system used  computing performance  application software  connecting method  media type  media size and job complexity     b  C46xFW only     3  Maintenance    Storing the toner cartridge    Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light  temperature  and humidity  Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to  ensure optimal performance  highest quality  and longest life from your new  Samsung toner cartridge     Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used   This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions  The toner  cartridge should remain in its original and unopened packa
88. atements       Wireless guidance       Low power  Radio LAN devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless communication  devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band  may be present  embedded  in  your printer system  The following section is a general overview of  considerations while operating a wireless device     Additional limitations  cautions  and concerns for specific countries are listed in  the specific country sections  or country group sections   The wireless devices in  your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio  Approval Marks on the system rating label  If the country you will be using the  wireless device in  is not listed  contact your local Radio Approval agency for  requirements  Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be  allowed     5  Appendix 134     Regulatory information    The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time  Because  the wireless devices  which may be embedded into your printer  emit less  energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and  recommendations  manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use   Regardless of the power levels  care should be taken to minimize human contact  during normal operation     As a general guideline  a separation of 20 cm  8 inches  between the wireless  device and the body  for use of a wireless device near the body  this does not  include e
89. b  select Edit from the Watermark drop down list  The Edit Watermarks window appears   c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete    d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window     4  Special Features 234    Printing features    Item Description    This option is available only when you use the PCL SPL printer driver  This option is not available when you use XPS driver    An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive  HDD  as a special file format that can be printed on any document   Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper  Rather than using preprinted letterhead  you can create an overlay containing                                        Overla f f            y exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead  To print a letter with your company s letterhead  you do not need to load    preprinted letterhead paper in the machine  just print the letterhead overlay on your document   A A To use a page overlay  you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image   KU e The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay  Do not create an overlay with a watermark   ll  e The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay   To save the document as an overlay  access Printing Preferences   Click the Advanced tab  and select Edit from the Text drop down l
90. b and select the Show completed jobs check box to see  previous jobs on the job list     Classes  Shows the class that your machine is in  Click Add to Class  to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class  to remove the machine from the selected class     4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window     4  Special Features 240    Scan features        TWAIN  TWAIN is one of the preset imaging applications  Scanning an       2 e For basic scanning features  refer to the Basic Guide  see  Basic scanning  image launches the selected application  enabling you to control the  on page 63   scanning process  This feature can be used via the local connection or the  e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods network connection  see  Scanning from image editing program  on page   see  Features by model  on page 7   245      e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  factors  including computer speed  available disk space  memory  the  size of the image being scanned  and bit depth settings  Thus  depending  on your system and what you are scanning  you may not be able to scan  at certain resolutions  especially using enhanced dpi     WIA  WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition  To use this feature  your   computer must be connected directly with the machine via a USB cable  see   Scanning using the WIA driver  on page 245      F   USB Memory  You can scan a document and save the sc
91. ber     1 Select ct pia  fax   gt      Address Book   gt  Search amp Dial  gt  Speed Dial  or Group Dial on the control panel     2 Enter All or ID and press OK     3 Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter  you want to search   For example  if you want to find the name    MOBILE     press the 6 button   which is labeled with    MNO        4 Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     You can check your     Address Book  settings by printing a list     1  2    Select ct aS  fax   gt      Address Book   gt  Print on the control panel     Press OK     The machine begins printing     4  Special Features 228      Printing features    2 e For basic printing features  refer to the Basic Guide  see  Basic printing       Ifyou want to change the settings for each print job  change it in Printing  on page 52       Preferences   e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Features by model  on page 7                  Setting your machine as a default machine    Changing the default print settings Eka Windows Startmen       Click the Windows Start menu  Select Control Panel  gt  Devices and Printers     Select Control Panel  gt  Devices and Printers  Select your machine     If Printing preferences has a B   you can select other printer drivers    1   Right click on your machine  4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer   E   connected to the selected printer        If Printing preferences
92. bile device to the internet through the  printer s Wi Fi Direct              e The supported protocol list may differ from your model  Wi Fi Direct  networks do NOT support IPv6  network filtering  IPSec  WINS  and SLP  services        The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct  is 3     Setting up Wi Fi Direct       You can enable Wi Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods   From the USB cable connected computer recommended     After the driver installation is complete  Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be  used to change Wi Fi Direct settings     KU Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows             and Mac OS users only         From the Start menu  select Programs or All Programs  gt  Samsung  Printers  gt  Samsung Easy Printer Manager  gt  Device Settings  gt  Network       Wi Fi Direct On Off  Select On to enable       Device Name  Enter the printer   s name for searching for your printer on  a wireless network  By default  the device name is the model name       IP Address  Enter the IP address of the printer  This IP address is used  only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless  network  We recommend using the default local IP address  the default  local IP address of the printer for Wi Fi Direct is 192 168 3 1       Group Owner  Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi Fi Direct  group   s owner  The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point   We recommend activating th
93. cations of separation     Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels   Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing  which can cause  paper jams  Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine  components     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup G    Media and tray    Preprinted paper       Setting the paper size and type       When loading preprinted paper  the printed side should be facing up with an    uncurled edge at the front  If you experience problems with paper feeding  turn After loading paper in the paper tray  set the paper size and type using the  the paper around  Note that print quality is not guaranteed  control panel buttons     2 e The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print  without a paper mismatch error        To change the paper setting set in the machine  from the Samsung Easy  Printer Manager select A  Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device    Settings   Or if your machine supports a display screen  you can set it using the          Menu  button on the control panel    Then  set the paper type from the Printing preferences window  gt   Must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt  vaporize  or Paper tab  gt  Paper Type  see  Opening printing preferences  on page  release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine   s fusing 54      temperature for 0 1 second  about 170  C  338  F      It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for    Preprinted paper in
94. ce such as a coin operated device or a card reader  Those devices  allow the pay for print service on your machine     FTP       A File Transfer Protocol  FTP  is acommonly used protocol for exchanging files  over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol  such as the Internet or an  intranet      Fuser Unit       The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media  It consists of  a heat roller and a pressure roller  After toner is transferred onto the paper  the  fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper  permanently  which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer     Glossary 331    Glossary    Gateway    IEEE          A connection between computer networks  or between a computer network  and a telephone line  It is very popular  as it is a computer or a network that  allows access to another computer or network     Grayscale    The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  IEEE  is an international  non profit  professional organization for the advancement of technology  related to electricity     IEEE 1284          A shade of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color  images are converted to grayscale  colors are represented by various shades of    gray     Halftone       An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots  Highly  colored areas consist of a large number of dots  while lighter areas consist of a  smaller number of dots     Mas
95. computer that is connected to the access point  or wireless router      The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight   digit PIN     The WPS LED blinks in the order below     a Thelight blinks fast on the WPS LED  The machine is connecting to  the access point  or wireless router      b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  network  the WPS LED light stays on     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive  and follow the  instructions in the window to set up the wireless network     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 164    Wireless network setup    Re connecting to a network    Disconnecting from a network          When the wireless function is off  the machine automatically tries to re connect  to the access point  or wireless router  with the previously used wireless  connection settings and address     In the following cases  the machine automatically re connects to the  wireless network        The machine is turned off and on again     The access point  or wireless router  is turned off and on again     Canceling the connection process       To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to    the wireless network  press and release the  Cancel or Stop Clear  or   Power Wakeup  button on the control panel  You need to wait 2 minutes to  re connect to the wireless network     To disconnect the wireless network connection  press the 63  WPS  button on  the control panel for more than two
96. d by  default     1    Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct features are enabled on your cell phone  and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer  see  Setting up Wi Fi  Direct  on page 186      Tag the NFC antenna on your cell phone  usually located on the back of  the cell phone  over the NFC tag    on your printer     Wait few seconds for Samsung Mobile Print app to start        2  Using a Network Connected Machine 193    Using the NFC feature    2 R       For some cell phones  NFC antenna might not be located at the back of  the cell phone  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your cell phone  before tagging     If error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a changed  PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  update the PIN number     If you do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your cell  phone  it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app  download page  Download the app and try again     3 Select the content you want to print     If neccessary  change the print option by pressing the B     4 Tag the NFC antenna on your cell phone usually located on the back of  the cell phone  over the NFC tag    on your printer     Wait few seconds for the cell phone to connect to the printer           For some cell phones  NFC antenna might not be located at the back of  the cell phone  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your cell phone  before tagging    If error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a
97. d value              e Confirm Network Password  Confirm the encryption network  5 On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time  screen  select password value     Yes  Iwill set up my printer s wireless network  Then  click Next    WEP Key Index  If you are using WEP Encryption  select the appropriate    If your printer is already connected on the network  select No  my WEP Key Index     printer is already connected to my network  The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network    has security enabled   6 Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method a   screen  Then  click Next  Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next   e WEP  Wired Equivalent Privacy  is a security protocol preventing  unauthorized access to your wireless network  WEP encrypts the data  portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit    or 128 bit WEP encryption key     2  Using a Network Connected Machine     Wireless network setup    8 The window showing the wireless network setting appears  Check the    L        settings and click Next     Before entering the IP address for the machine  you must know the  computer s network configuration information  If the computer s network  configuration is set to DHCP  the wireless network setting should also be  DHCP  Likewise  if the computer s network configuration is set to Static  the  wireless network setting should also be Static     If your computer is se
98. del     1  Introduction 19    Machine overview                            i   Thisillustration may differ from your machine depending on your model   There are various types of machine     e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7      C46xW                1 Scanner lid 8 Toner cartridges  2   Handle 9   Waste toner container  3 Tray 10   Imaging unit                   4 Front door 11   Scan unit   gt   5   Output support 12 USB port  6 Control panel 13 Scanner glass       7   NFC tag       b  Be careful not to pinch your fingers           a  Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit     1  Introduction EJ    Machine overview    C46xFW    a  Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit   b  Be careful not to pinch your fingers           1 Document feeder cover 10   NFC tag       2 Document feeder width 11    Toner cartridge  guide leg       3 Document feeder input tray 12 Waste toner container                   4   Document feeder output 13      Imaging unit  support  5 Handle 14 Scan unit  P  6  Tray 15 USB port  7  Front cover 16 Scanner lid  8 Document output tray 17 Scanner glass       9   Control panel             1  Introduction lan    I Machine overview       Rear view          i   Thisillustration may differ from your machine depending on your model   There are various types of machine              e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model o
99. dia specifications  on page 117      Print watermark  You can customize your documents with words  such as     CONFIDENTIAL     see  Using advanced print features  on page 230      Print posters  The text and pictures of each page of your document are  magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then be  taped together to form a poster  see  Using advanced print features  on  page 230      You can print in various operating systems  see  System requirements    on  page 120      Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and or a network interface     Supports various wireless network setting method       _      o       Using the WPS  Wi Fi Protected Setup   button    You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on  the machine and the access point  a wireless router       Using the USB cable or a network cable      You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB  cable or a network cable     e Using the Wi Fi Direct    You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi Fi or  Wi Fi Direct feature     KA See  Introducing wireless set up methods  on page 160           Features by model    Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country     Operating System    Operating System C46xFW       Windows bd       Mac                   Linux           e  Included  Blank  Not available        Features by model    Software    2 You can install the printer driver and softwar
100. dix 118    Specifications       Type    Size    Dimensions    Print media weight Capacity          Tray       Minimum size  custom     76x 152 mm  3 x 6 inches        Maximum size  custom     a  Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight  thickness  and environmental conditions        216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches        60 to 120 g m   16 to 32 Ibs bond     b  The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250  sheffield   This means the numeric level of smoothness        2 If media weight is over 120 g m   32 Ibs bond   load a paper into the tray one by one     5  Appendix 119    i Specifications    System requirements    Microsoft   Windows               Requirement  recommended   Operating system                CPU RAM free HDD space  Windows   XP Intel   Pentium   III 933 MHz  Pentium IV 1 GHz  128 MB  256 MB  1 5 GB  Windows Server   2003 Intel   Pentium   IlI 933 MHz  Pentium IV 1 GHz  128 MB  512 MB  1 25 GB to 2 GB  Windows Server   2008 Intel   Pentium   IV 1 GHz  Pentium IV 2 GHz  512 MB  2 GB  10 GB  Windows Vista   Intel   Pentium   IV 3 GHz 512 MB  1 GB  15 GB  Windows   7 Intel   Pentium   IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB  2 GB  16 GB               Support for DirectX   9 graphics with 128 MB memory  to enable the Aero theme    e DVD R W Drive       Windows Server   2008 R2 Intel   Pentium   IV 1 GHz  x86  or 1 4 GHz  x64  processors  2 GHz or faster  512 MB  2 GB  10 GB          Windows   8 Intel   Pentium   IV 1 GHz 3
101. documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on    page 48      3 Click Start  gt  Control Panel  gt  Hardware and Sound  gt  Devices and  Printers     4 Right click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes  gt  Start Scan     5 New Scan application appears     4  Special Features ga    Scan features    6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your 4 Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start   preferences affect the picture   5 Make adjustments to the image  Scan Settings and More Options      7 Scan and save your scanned image     6 Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview       image   Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator 7 Select to Save to Location  Send to E mail  or Send to SNS   Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan  compile  2 Click on Save  Saving a Scan   Send   E mailing a Scan   or Share  and save documents in multiple formats  including  epub format   Uploading    KA   Availabe for Windows OS users only  KA If there is room on the document glass  more than one item can be scanned       e Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum    f at the same time  Use the   tool to make multiple selection areas   requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator     e Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you  install the machine software  see  Using Samsung Easy Document  Creator  on page 270      1
102. dvanced print features  on page 230      a it you are a Mac or Linux operating systems user  refer to the Advanced  Guide  see  Mac printing  on page 237 or  Linux printing  on page 239         The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7     1 Open the document you want to print     2 Select Print from the File menu     K For special printing features  refer to the Advanced Guide  see  Using    3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list        Cg                DPwtiotie  Peene     Duar Find Printer       Page Range    Al Number of copies  1      Selection Current Page    Pages Collate    1  22 33                 8m J   Cancd    app             4 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range  are selected within the Print window     2 To take advantage of the advanced printing features  click Properties or  Preferences from the Print window  see  Opening printing preferences  on  page 54         5 To start the print job  click OK or Print in the Print window     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 152    Basic printing    Canceling a print job    If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler  cancel the job as  follows           You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon    8      a  in the Windows task bar     You can also cancel the current job by pressing  Stop Clear  on the    control panel        2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 153    Basic printing    Opening printing 
103. e        e Not Compatible   color  toner   e Not Compatible  toner cartridge    The toner cartridge is not  suitable for your machine     Install the corresponding  toner cartridge with  aSamsung genuine  cartridge        Not original     color  toner    The toner cartridge is not a  Samsung genuine toner  cartridge     Install the corresponding  toner cartridge with a  Samsung genuine  cartridge          Prepare toner      Prepare new  cartridge       Small amount of toner is left  in the indicated cartridge   The estimated cartridge life  of toner is close        Prepare a new cartridge  for a replacement  You  may temporarily increase  the printing quality by  redistributing the toner   see  Redistributing toner   on page 79      Message    Replace toner    Replace new  cartridge    Meaning    Theindicated toner cartridge  has almost reached its    estimated cartridge life         Suggested solutions    Youcanchoose Stop or  Continue as shown on  the control panel  If you  select Stop  the printer  stops printing and you  cannot print any more  without changing the  cartridge  If you select  Continue  the printer  keeps printing but the  printing quality cannot  be guaranteed   Besides  it can cause  serious damage to your  machine     e Replace the toner  cartridge for the best  print quality when this  message appears   Using a cartridge  beyond this stage can  result in printing  quality issues  see   Replacing the toner  cartridge  on page 81            Theindicated to
104. e  Software  on page 8    l Error The Machine hasaiieastone eiro          Samsung l rinter status    Samsung Printer Status overview       If an error occurs while operating  you can check the error from the Samsung  Printer Status  Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install  the machine software     You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually  Go to the Printing  Preferences  click the Basic tab  gt  Printer Status button     3 4  These icons appear on the Windows task bar  asana aaa    Jil                         Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each  toner cartridge  The machine and the number of   1 toner cartridge s  shown in the above window may  differ depending on the machine in use  Some  machines do not have this feature     5  Useful Management Tools            Using Samsung Printer Status                      2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings   3 Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s  from  online   User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide   KU This button opens the Troubleshooting   a Guide when an error occurs  You can directly  open the troubleshooting section in the  user s guide    5 Close Close the window           5  Useful Management Tools    Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator    The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring Unified Driver Configurator   machine devices  You need to install Unified Linux Drive
105. e 150      Installing driver over the network    Silent installation Mode       2 e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7         Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user  intervention  Once you start the installation  the machine driver and software  are automatically installed on you computer  You can start the silent installation  by typing  s or  S in the command window     e The machine that does not support the network interface  it will not be  able to use this feature  see  Rear view  on page 22        You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the  software CD into your CD ROM drive   For windows  select the printer driver and software in the Select  Software to Install window  Command line Parameters    Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window        KU Following command line are effective and operated when command is  used with  s or  S  But  h   H or    are exceptional commands that can be  operated solely              WA The firewall software might be blocking network communication  Before  connecting the device to the network  disable the computer s firewall              Command  line Definition Description   1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  on  Also  your machine s IP address should have been set  see  Setting IP  address  on page 148    S     s or Starts
106. e See Resolution on pagana   Forwards the sent fax to other destination by a fax  See    Original Size Sets the image size  Send Forward  Forwarding a sent fax to another destination  on page  253              3  Useful Setting Menus 209    Fax    Item    Rcv  Forward    Description    Forwards the received fax to other destination by a fax  or PC  If you are out of office but have to receive the fax   this feature may be useful  See  Forwarding a received  fax  on page 254        Secure Receive    Stores the received fax in memory without printing out   To print received documents  you need to enter the  password  You can prevent your received faxes from  being accessed by unauthorized people  see  Receiving  in secure receiving mode  on page 257         Adds additional documents to a reserved delay fax job       Add Page  see  Adding documents to a reserved fax  on page  252    CancelJab Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory    Sending setup    WU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on             page 31          see  Canceling a reserved fax job  on page 252      To change the menu options     e Press pi  fax   gt  13  Menu   gt  Fax Setup  gt  Sending on the control panel     Item Description    Sets the number of redial attempts  If you enter 0  the    Redial Times        machine will not redial        Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic 
107. e application you are using     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 63    I Basic faxing    L                    C46xFW only     For special faxing features  refer to the Advanced Guide  see  Fax  features  on page 250      You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone  For more  information ask your internet service provider     We recommend using traditional analog phone services  PSTN  Public  Switched Telephone Network  when connecting telephone lines to use  a fax machine  If you use other Internet services  DSL  ISDN  VoIP   you can  improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter  The Micro filter  eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or  Internet quality  Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the  machine  contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro   filter           1 Line port   2 Micro filter   3 DSL modem   Telephone line   see  Rear view  on page 22      Preparing to fax    Before you send or receive a fax  you need to connect the supplied line cord to  your telephone wall jack  see  Rear view  on page 22   Refer to the Quick  Installation Guide how to make a connection  The method of making a  telephone connection is different from one country to another     Sending a fax    When you place the originals  you can use either the document feeder or  the scanner glass  If the originals are placed on both the document feeder  and the scanner glass  the machine will read the originals on th
108. e demo page to check whether your ass  Demo Page Pe aes  machine is printing properly or not  Prints information on your machine   s network  Network Conf  Rnecroinniad ConfiauintiGn  Prints all of the fax number currently stored in Babaan aaa  Address Book ae  the machine   s memory  Prints a usage page  The usage page contains the    Count  Usage Counter total number of pages printed           Fax Options Prints the information of a fax report     3  Useful Setting Menus 219      System setup    a Item  Maintenance    Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31         Image Mgr   To change the menu options       Press 43   Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Maintenance on the control panel     Item Description    Description    Allows you to adjust the color setting such as contrast  level  color registration  color density  etc     e Custom Color  adjusts contrast  color by color     Default  optimizes colors automatically       Print Density  allows you to manually adjust the  color contrast for each cartridge  It is  recommended to use the Default setting for best  color quality     e Tone Adjust   The machine calibrates the toner  density of machine for the best possible color print  quality        When toner cartridge is empty  this option appears  You    CLR Empty Msg   ie ee can clear the empty message     Serial Number       Shows the machine   s serial number  When
109. e document  feeder first  which has higher priority in scanning        1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48     2 Select L  fax  on the control panel     3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  see   Adjusting the document settings  on page 67      2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 64    I Basic faxing    4 Enter the destination fax number  see  Keypad letters and numbers  on Sending afax manually  page 225         5 Brace Q  Start  on the control panel  The machine starts to scan and Perform the following to send a fax using     On Hook Dial  on the control          send the fax to the destinations  panel   KA e If you want to send a fax directly from your computer  use Samsung If your machine is a handset model  you can send a fax using the handset  Network PC Fax  see  Sending a fax in the computer  on page 251      see  Variety feature  on page 10      When you want to cancel a fax job  press    stop clean before the    machine starts transmission  I  1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the    documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      If you used the scanner glass  the machine shows the message asking to  place another page     Select  gt  fax  on the control panel   2 B    3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  see   Adjusting the docum
110. e installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     2  Using a Network Connected Machine     Wireless network setup    Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type 7 After searching the wireless networks  a list of wireless networks your  screen  Then  click Next  machine has searched appears  Click Advanced Setting     S Printer Connection Type       Enter the wireless Network Name  Enter the SSID name you want  SSID    a Select Sota Select how the printer wil be connected to your computer or network is case sensitive      4  Installation             ae e Operation Mode  Select ad hoc     Connect the printer to this computer using a US cable  e Channel  Select the channel   Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz      Network connection   Authentication  Select an authentication type     Connect the printer to the same network as this comp    IE your Ly connected to the eer e lal detect the printer  Open System  Authentication is not used  and encryption may or may  Di ka not be used  depending on the need for data security     Farah larry a2  Shared Key  Authentication is used  A device that has a proper WEP key  network  This is only available for printers that support wireless networking   can access the network     Selectif you want to install the software without connecting the printer  e Encryption  Select the encryption  None  WEP64  WEP 128          ema     ne      co   e Network Password  Enter the encryption network passwor
111. e name gt     or     V  lt share name gt        Shares installed machine  and add other available  platform drivers for Point  amp   Print     It will install all supported  Windows OS platform   s  machine drivers to system  and share it with specified   lt share name gt  for point and  print               o or Opens Printers and Faxes   This command will open   O folder after installation  Printers and Faxes folder   after the silent installation    h  H or    Shows Command line Usage        O N AO Ul A    Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  on     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop   For Mac OS X 10 8  double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder     Double click the MAC_Installer folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   Click Continue    Read the license agreement and click Continue    Click Agree to agree to the license agreement     Click Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  installed     If you click Customize  you can choose individual components to install     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 153    Installing driver over the network    11    12  13  14    15    16  17             Enter the password and click OK     Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless  on the Printer  Connection Type and click Continue     Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer  list     Click IP and se
112. e off  press this button  Wakeup for more than three seconds when the machine is in ready mode    9 Start Dp Starts a job    10 Back KI  Sends you back to the upper menu level    11   Status LED Indicates the status of your machine  see  Understanding the status LED  on page 105     12 Eco Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc printing and copying only  see  Eco printing  on page   56    13 Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine        1  Introduction 24      Control panel overview    C46xFW                   NG BUS  YW OB 9 10 11 12 13                                                       1 WPS Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer  see  Using the WPS button  on page 162    2   ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver s license on a single side of paper  see  ID card copying  on page 61    3   Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation   4 Copy Switches to Copy mode   5 Fax pia Switches to Fax mode   6 Arrows Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values   7   Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus  see  Menu overview  on page 31    Menu T3             1  Introduction        Control panel overview                                           8 OK Confirms the selection on the screen    9 
113. e support  FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com fi   support  FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com   fr support  0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw  www samsung com   0180 6 7267864  de support  GERMANY  HHP  0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw   0180 6 67267864    0 20     Anruf  aus dem dt  Festnetz  aus dem  Mobilfunk max  0 60     Anruf   GEORGIA 0 800 555 555 www samsung com              support          GHANA 0302 200077 africa_en support  80111 SAMSUNG  80111 726 www samsung com   7864  only from land line gr support  GREECE    30  210 6897691 from mobile  and land line  1 800 299 0013 www samsung com   1 800 299 0033 latin support   Spanish   GUATEMALA  www samsung com   latin_en support   English   800 2791 9267 www samsung com   800 2791 9111  BUNn pUppon   Spanish   HONDURAS  www samsung com   latin_en support   English    852  3698 4698 www samsung com   hk support  Chinese   HONG KONG          www samsung com   hk_en support   English     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    WebSite    Country Region    Customer Care Center    WebSite                                                             HUNGARY 0680SAMSUNG  0680 726 786    www samsung com  KENYA 0800 545 545 www samsung com   0680PREMIUM  0680 773 648    Mu support support   a 1800 3000 8282   Toll Free www samsung com  Maa a a aED a Cony    ae support  English   1800 266 8282   Toll Free in support KUWAIT pp j  www samsung com   INDONESIA 021 56997777 www samsung com  
114. e when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive        For Windows  select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window     Software C46xFW       SPL printer driver e       PCL printer driver          PS printer driver        XPS printer driver        Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC settings       Fax to PC settings       Device Settings          Samsung Easy Document Creator       Samsung Easy Color Manager        Samsung Printer Status       AnyWeb Print        SyncThru    Web Service                      Features by model    Software C46xFW       SyncThru Admin Web Service          Easy Eco Driver o       Fax Samsung Network PC Fax       Scan Twain scan driver e e       WIA scan driver                      a  Download the software from the Samsung website and install it   http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or Downloads   Before installing  check whether your  computer   s OS support the software      e  Included  Blank  Not available        Features by model    Variety feature    Features C46xFW       Hi Speed USB 2 0          Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN          Network Interface 802 11b g n wireless LAN        NFC printing scanning       Google Cloud Print          AirPrint       Eco printing  Control panel        Duplex  2 sided  printing  Manual         USB memory interface e       Automatic Document Feeder  ADF                       a  Depending on your country  wireless LAN c
115. eferences  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54   Ensure the correct paper type is selected  For example   If Thicker Paper is selected  but Plain Paper actually used  an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem              e If you are using a new toner cartridge  redistribute the toner first  see  Redistributing toner  on page 79            Toner particles are around bold The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper     characters or pictures   Change the printer option and try again  Go to Printing Preferences  click the Paper tab  and set the paper type to Recycled  see     Opening printing preferences  on page 54         e Ensure the correct paper type is selected  For example  If Thicker Paper is selected  but Plain Paper actually used  an overcharging  can occur causing this copy quality problem              6  Troubleshooting 286      Printing quality problems    Condition    Misformed characters    AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCcac   AaBbCcac          Suggested solutions    If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images  the paper stock may be too slick  Try different paper        Page skew             Ensure that the paper is loaded properly   Check the paper type and quality   Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack                 Ensure that the paper is loaded properly   Check the paper type and quality  Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl   T
116. eful Management Tools 261     Samsung AnyWeb Print    This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Software  on page 8         Available for Windows and Mac OS users only  see  Software  on page 8      This tool helps you screen capture  preview  scrap  and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily  than when you use an ordinary program     Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it   http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or Downloads      5  Useful Management Tools 262    Easy Eco Driver    With the Easy Eco Driver  you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing     Easy Eco Driver also allows you to do simple editing such as removing images and texts  and more  You can save frequently used settings as a preset        2 Available for Windows OS users only     How to use     1  2  3  4       Open a document to print    Open printing preference window  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54    From the Favorites tab  select Eco Printing Preview    Click OK  gt  Print in the window    A preview window appears    Select the options you want to apply to the document    You can see the preview of the applied features    Click Print     window     2 If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print  check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference    5  Useful Management Tools 263      Using SyncThru    Web 
117. enables an user to use a single telephone   line to answer several different telephone numbers  This feature is often used by  answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need  to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone     4  Special Features 256    i Fax features       BE       KA This setting may not be available depending on your country     Select pis  fax   gt  13  Menu   gt  Fax Setup  gt  Receiving  gt  DRPD Mode   gt  Waiting Ring on the control panel     Call your fax number from another telephone     When your machine begins to ring  do not answer the call  The machine  requires several rings to learn the pattern    When the machine completes learning  the display shows Completed  DRPD Setup  If the DRPD setup fails  Error DRPD Ring appears     Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2     KA e DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number  or connect    the machine to another telephone line     e After DRPD has been set up  call your fax number again to verify that the  machine answers with a fax tone  Then have a call placed to a different  number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the    extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket     Receiving in secure receiving mode       K This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Features by model  on page 7         You may need to prevent your received
118. end a fax to destinations        Forwarding a sent fax to another destination    You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination  by a fax  If you are out of office but have to receive the fax  this feature may be  useful     1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder     Press  amp   fax   gt  13  Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Send Forward  gt  Forward  2      to Fax  gt  On on the control panel         Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  goods  see  Variety feature  on page 10               3 Enter the destination fax number  email address  or server address and  press OK     4 Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine     4  Special Features 253    Fax features    Forwarding a received fax    You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination    by a fax  If you are out of office but have to receive the fax  this feature may be  useful     1 Press  amp   fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Receive Forward or Rev   Forward  gt Forward to Fax or Forward to PC  gt  Forward on the control  panel          Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  goods  see  Variety feature  on page 10                 To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  completed  select Forward amp P
119. ending on your country  To change the  size to A4 or Letter  you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly        2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI    Media and tray    1 Pull the tray out of the machine  Open the paper cover and remove 3 Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever   paper from the tray if necessary     2 If you want to change the size to Letter  hold the lever at the back of the  tray  and rotate the lever clockwise              Sr  me    If you want to change the size to A4  first move the paper width guide to left  and rotate the lever counterclockwise  If you force the lever  it could  damage the tray     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 43     Media and tray    The table below shows the special media usable in tray     The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a  paper mismatch error     To change the paper setting set in the machine  from the Samsung Easy Printer    Manager select J  Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device Settings   Or if your machine supports a display screen  you can set it using the EF   Menu   button on the control panel     Then  set the paper type from the Printing preferences window  gt  Paper tab  gt   Paper Type  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54      2 e When using special media  we recommend you feed one sheet at a time   see  Print media specifications  on page 117         e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine  dependin
120. ent settings  on page 67      4 Press     On Hook Dial  on the control panel or lift the handset   5 Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel     6 Press  lt    start  on the control panel when you hear a high pitched fax  signal from the remote fax machine     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 65    Basic faxing    Sending a fax to multiple destinations       You can use the multiple send feature  which allows you to send a fax to multiple  locations  Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote  station  After transmission  the originals are automatically erased from memory     2 You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an  option or if the fax is in color        1 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48     2 Select  lt   fax  on the control panel     3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs  see   Adjusting the document settings  on page 67      Select NE  Menu  5 Fax Feature 5 Multi Send on the control panel   4    5 Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK   You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using    the     Address book  button     6 Enter the second fax number and press OK     The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document              To enter more fax numbers  press OK when Yes appears a
121. er  your machine s new IP address in the browser window     For example         http   192  168  1 133        3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru   Web Service website     If it   s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to  log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and Password   We recommend you to change the default password for security  reasons     ID  admin    Password  sec00000    When the Embedded Web Service window opens  click Settings  gt   Network Settings     Click Raw TCP IP  LPR  IPP or mDNS     You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 198    AirPrint    Printing via AirPrint    For example  the iPad manual provides these instructions     S ARUN             Open your email  photo  web page  or document you want to print   Touch the action icon  fq    Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up     Touch Print button  Print it out     Cancelling print job  To cancel the printing job or view the print summary   click the print center icon      in multitasking area  You can click cancel in    the print center     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 199    Google Cloud Print    Google Cloud Print    is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your  smart phone  tablet  or any other web connected devices  Just register your  Google account with the printer  and you are ready to use the Google Cloud  Print service  You can print your documen
122. er dust  toner cartridge  waste toner  bottle  imaging unit  etc   follow the instructions below     e When disposing of the supplies  follow the instructions for  disposal  Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions     e Do not wash the supplies     e Fora waste toner bottle  do not reuse it after emptying the  bottle     If you do not follow the instructions above  it may cause machine  malfunction and environmental pollution  The warranty does not  cover damages caused by a user s carelessness        O    Using recycled supplies  such as toner  can cause damage to the  machine     In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies  a service  fee will be charged              When toner gets on your clothing  do not use hot water to wash  it     Hot water sets toner into fabric  Use cold water                 Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser  unit     This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire              When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper   be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes     Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested     1  Introduction 18    Machine overview    Accessories                           Power cord Quick installation guide  Software CD  Misc  accessories        a  The software CD contains the print drivers  user s guide  and software applications   b  Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific mo
123. er folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   Access point via USB cable       Click Continue     Items to prepare Read the license agreement and click Continue     Access point    Click Agree to agree to the license agreement     Network connected printer    CON QAU A    Software CD that was provided with your machine Lik Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  installed   A machine installed with a wireless network interface f   HG    If you click Customize  you can choose individual components to install   USB cable  9 Enter the password and click OK     1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and    powered on     2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    10 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection  Type and click Continue     OOO Printer Connection Type       Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network     g  _  USB Connected Printer    Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable     a _  Network Conneted Printer  Wired or Wireless     wa Connect the printer to the same network as this computer     If you want to change IP address of your device  click    Set IP Address     Button          Set IP Address                lt   gt     Configuration of Wireless network           This is for users who have not set up the wireless connection before   The installer will help you set up the wirele
124. er has expired  waste toner container related message appears on the screen display of the control panel  indicating  the waste toner container needs to be replaced  Check the waste toner container for your machine  see  Available supplies  on page 76   For information about  installing the waste toner container  refer to the waste toner container installation guide included on the package     a e Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged  Contact a service representative when print quality problems  4 occur              e When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine  move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands     e Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill     A Do not tilt or turn over the container     3  Maintenance 83     Replacing the waste toner container    WY        ISIS               O       2          ANA     D O   M C  VANS  X                O   o   o V G   sa   o   INN       3  Maintenance    Replacing the imaging unit    When the life span of the imaging unit has expired  the Printing Status window appears on the computer  indicating the imaging unit needs to be placed  Otherwise   your machine stops printing     A e Don t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package  You could damage the surface of the imaging unit   e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit   e To p
125. er section 86 to 120 g m   23 to 32 Ibs bond   RAPSI paper section   5 sheets    Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m   16 to 19 Ibs bond   Thin paper       paper section            150 sheets of 60 g m   16 Ibs bond     5  Appendix    i Specifications    Type Size          Refer to the Plain    Cotton 3  paper section    Dimensions       Refer to the Plain paper section    Print media weight Capacity     Tray    75 to 90 g m   20 to 24 Ibs bond     150 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ibs bond        Colored   Refer to the Plain    Pre printed  f  paper section    Refer to the Plain paper section    60 to 85 g m   16 to 24 Ibs bond     150 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ibs bond                 Recycled  Letter  Legal  Oficio  Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m   32 to 40 Ibs bond   b Folio  A4  JIS B5  I  Labels US Folio     JISB5  ISO o Seken  B5  Executive  A5  Letter  Legal  Oficio  Refer to the Plain paper section 121 to 163 g m   32 to 43 Ibs bond   US Folio  A4  JIS B5  ISO  cardstock B5  Executive  A5 HE  Postcard 4x6  HAMOG  Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g m   28 to 32 Ibs bond   a a aad paper section    10 sheets  heh Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 70 to 90 g m   18 6 to 24 Ibs bond   rchive    paper section    e 100 sheets       Letter  A4   Postcard 4x6    Glossy Photo   Matte Photo          Refer to the Plain paper section       111 to 220 g m   30 to 58 Ibs bond       1sheets    5  Appen
126. ere is no  guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation  If this  equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception     Taiwan only       2a which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on  the user is  AS ha R Pi ESA Ele encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  mga ast BA SS Bee ES A lB measures     e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna     e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver     5  Appendix    Regulatory information    Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  which the receiver is connected     Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help     KU Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the  equipment              Canadian radio interference regulations       This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise  emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing  equipment standard entitled    Digital Apparatus     ICES 003 of the Industry and  Science Canada     Cet appareil num  rique respecte les limites de bruits radio  lectriques  applicables aux appareils num  riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le  mat  riel brouilleur     Appareils Num  riques     ICES 003   dict  e par l Industrie et  Sciences Canada     United States of America    Fede
127. erted through CIE color space  Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System  you should  upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later  You can find recent Ghostscript versions at  www ghostscript com        The machine does not print It isa known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript  64 bit Linux OS  and has been  whole pages  and output is reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v  8 52 or above  Download the  printed on half the page  latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http   sourceforge net projects ghostscript  and install it to solve this problem        6  Troubleshooting     Operating system problems    Condition    I cannot scan via Gimp Front   end     Suggested solutions    Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog  on the Acquire menu  If not  you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your  computer  You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page  For the detailed information   refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application     If you wish to use another kind of scan application  refer to application   s Help           Cannot open port device file     error message appears when  printing a document     Avoid changing print job parameters  e q   via LPR GUI  while a print job is in progress  Known versions of C
128. es  CLT W406       a  Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798  The number of pages may be affected by operating environment  printing interval  graphics  media type and media size   b  Image counts based on one color on each page  If you print documents in full color  Cyan  Magenta  Yellow  Black   the life of this item will be reduced by 25      2 Depending on the options  percentage of image area and job mode used  the toner cartridge   s lifespan may differ     A When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies  these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using  Otherwise  new toner  cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific  country conditions     A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner  Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine  Samsung toner cartridge s quality  Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine   s  warranty     3  Maintenance    Available maintenance parts    To purchase maintenance parts  contact the source where you bought the machine  Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service  provider  dealer  or the retailer where you bought the machine  The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it h
129. es  on page 241      Basic Scanning    This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals     This is a basic scanning method for USB connected machine        2      It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for  some models     e Ifyou want to scan using the network  refer to the Advanced Guide  see   Scanning from network connected machine  on page 242      Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48     C46xFW  Select  scan   gt  Scan to PC Local PC on the control panel   OR    C46xW  Press Scan to  gt  Scan to PC  gt  Local PC on the control panel                    Ul          If you see Not Available message  check the port connection  or select  Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager  gt     Fl         Switch to advanced mode  gt  Scan to PC Settings     Select the scan destination you want and press OK     Default setting is My Documents     e You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list  Also  you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different  path       To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager  gt  22 Switch to  advanced mode  gt  Scan to PC Settings     Select the option you want and press OK     Scanning begins     Scanned image is saved in computer s C  Users users name My  Documents  The saved folder may differ  depending on your operating  system or th
130. es may appear at the bottom of  your copy     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 60    Basic copying    3 Place Front Side and Press  Start  appears on the display     ID card copyin  i eee    Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet  Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side    and Press  Start    The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and             the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original  This 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows  feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card  indicate as shown  Then  close the scanner lid         The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature  FE  e If the machine set to Eco mode  this feature is not available  fal       Depending on the model  the operating procedure may differ     E   1 Press ID Copy on the control panel   Place the front side of an original facing down on the sal glass 6 Press  Start  button   where arrows indicate as shown  Then  close the scanner lid        2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI      Basic copying    KA e Ifyou do not press the Gp  Start  button  only the front side will be  copied          If the original is larger than the printable area  some portions may not be  printed     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI    Basic scanning       For special scanning features  refer to the Advanced Guide  see  Scan  featur
131. es you step by step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software     Useful network programs 147  Wired network setup 148  Installing driver over the network 151  IPv6 configuration 156  Wireless network setup 159  Samsung Mobile Print 192  Using the NFC feature 193  AirPrint 198  Google Cloud Print 200    WA Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model  see  Features by  model  on page 7                  Useful network programs    There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a  network environment  For the network administrator especially  managing  several machines on the network is possible           Before using the programs below  set the IP address first              e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7         SyncThru    Web Service    The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the  following tasks  see  Using SyncThru    Web Service  on page 264      Check the supplies information and status   Customize machine settings     Set the email notification option  When you set this option  the machine  status  toner cartridge shortage or machine error  will be sent to a certain  person s email automatically     Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to  various network environments     SyncThru    Web Admin Service       Web based machine management sol
132. ets the language of the text that appears on the control    panel display           Turns power off automatically when the machine has  been in power save mode for the length of time set in  Auto Power Off  gt  On  gt  Timeout     2 e This option only appears in the C46xW          To turn the machine on again  press the      Power Wakeup  button on the control panel   make sure the main power switch is on      e Ifyou run the printer driver or Samsung Easy  Printer Manager  the time automatically  extends     e While the machine is connected to the  network or working on a print job  Auto  Power Off feature doesn t work     3  Useful Setting Menus bai      System setup    Item    Wakeup Event    Description Item    You can set the condition to wake up from power save  mode   e On  The machine wake up from the power save mode  on the following cases     Pressing any button    Opening or closing the paper tray Auto Continue    Inserting paper in the document feeder     Off  The machine wake up from the power save mode  only when the Power Wakeup button is pressed        System Timeout    Sets the time that the machine remembers previously    Description    Determine whether or not the machine continues  printing when it detects the paper does not match the  paper settings     e 30 Sec  If a paper mismatch occurs  an error message  will display  The machine waits for about 30 second   then automatically clear the message and continue  printing    e O Sec  Even though a paper mis
133. etwork interface  it will not be     _ able to use this feature  see  Rear view  on page 22         e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program     First  you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements   In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP   Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  server located on the network     IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Windows        Before using the SetIP program  disable the computer firewall from Control  Panel  gt  Security Center  gt  Windows Firewall     9 The following instructions may differ for your model        1 Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and  install it   http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or  Downloads      2 Follow the instructions in the installation window     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 148      Wired network setup    3       Connect your machine to the network with a network cable   Turn on the machine     From the Windows Start menu  select All Programs  gt  Samsung  Printers  gt  SetIP  gt  SetIP     Click the   icon  third from left  in the SetIP window to open the TCP   IP configuration window     Enter the machine   s new information into the configuration window  In  a corporate intranet  you may need to have this information assigned by  a network manager before proceeding     Find the machine   s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report   see  Printing a network configuration report  on page 148 
134. etwork setup    Machines without a display screen       Connecting in PBC mode    1    Press and hold the  3  WPS  button on the control panel for about 2   4  seconds until the status LED blinks quickly     The machine starts connecting to the wireless network  The LED blinks  slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the  access point  or wireless router      Press the WPS  PBC  button on the access point  or wireless router      a Thelight blinks fast on the WPS LED  The machine is connecting to  the access point  or wireless router      b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  network  the WPS LED light stays on     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive  and follow the  instructions in the window to set up the wireless network     Connecting in PIN mode    1    The network configuration report  including PIN  must be printed  see   Printing a network configuration report  on page 148      In ready mode  Press the       Cancel or Stop Clear  button for more than  five seconds on the control panel     The machine without the     Cancel or Stop Clear  button  Press the   WPS  63 button for more than ten seconds on the control panel    You can find your machine s PIN    Press and hold the 43  WPS  button on the control panel for more than  4 seconds until the status LED stays on    The machine starts connecting to the access point  or wireless router    You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the  
135. ey for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more  advanced security     WPS       The Wi Fi Protected Setup  WPS  is a standard for establishing a wireless home  network  If your wireless access point supports WPS  you can configure the  wireless network connection easily without a computer     XPS       XML Paper Specification  XPS  is a specification for a Page Description Language   PDL  and a new document format  which has benefits for portable document  and electronic document  developed by Microsoft  It is an XML based  specification  based on a new print path and a vector based device   independent document format     Glossary 339    Index                      A scan unit 92 adding documents to a reserved fax 252   KENA cleaning a machine 89 a  9 control panel 23 canceling a reserved fax job 252  255  management tools 317 p   nay  a delaying a fax transmission 251  address book CONVENTION 13  forwarding a received fax to another  editing 226 copy destination 254  253  group editing 227 general setup ave general setup 209  registering 226 copying Printing sent fax report automatically 258  using 226 basic copying 58 receiving a fax in the computer 254  258   address book setup 226 reducing or enlarging copies 60 256  257  255  256  250  AirPrint 198 D sending a fax in the computer 251  253  AnyWeb Print 262 fax feature 250  default settings fax sending  B tray setting 46 multi sending 66  buttons E faxing  eco 24  26 adjusting darkness 68  6
136. f R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC    The declaration of conformity may be consulted at  www samsung com  go to Support 5 Download center and enter  your printer  MFP  name to browse the EuDoC     January 1  1995  Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of  the member states related to low voltage equipment     January 1  1996  Council Directive 2004 108 EC  approximation of the laws of  the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility     March 9  1999  Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and  telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  conformity  A full declaration  defining the relevant Directives and referenced  standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co   Ltd   representative     EC Certification       Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment  amp  Telecommunications Terminal  Equipment Directive  FAX     This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European  single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network   PSTN  in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC  The product has been designed  to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European  countries     In the event of problems  you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung  Electronics Co   Ltd  in the first instance     The product has been tested against TBR21  To assist in the use and application  of terminal equipment which complies with this standard  the European  Telecommu
137. file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages        Some parts  such as the controller or the board   may be defective     Contact a service representative        The machine does not  print PDF files correctly   Some parts of graphics   text  or illustrations are  missing     Incompatibility between the PDF file and the  Acrobat products     Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print  Turn on Print As Image  from the Acrobat printing options     2 It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image           The print quality of  photos is not good   Images are not clear     The resolution of the photo is very low     Reduce the photo size  If you increase the photo size in the software application  the  resolution will be reduced        Before printing  the  machine emits vapor near  the output tray        Using damp paper can cause vapor during  printing        This is not a problem  Just keep printing     6  Troubleshooting 281    Printing problems    Condition    The machine does not  print special sized paper   such as billing paper     Possible cause    Paper size and paper size setting do not match     Suggested solutions    Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences  see   Opening printing preferences  on page 54         The printed billing paper  is curled        The paper type setting does not match        Change the printer option and try again  Go to Printing Preferences  click Paper tab
138. frica support  ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com   ar support  ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com   support  AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com   au support  AUSTRIA 0800   SAMSUNG  0800   www samsung com   7267864  at support  AZERBAIJAN 0 88 555 55 55 www samsung com   support  8000 GSAM  8000 4726  www samsung com   ae support  English   BAHRAIN pp g  www samsung com   ae_ar support  Arabic   BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com   support  BANGLADESH 09612300300 www samsung com           in support          02 201 24 18 www samsung com   be support  Dutch   BELGIUM  www samsung com   be_fr support  French   BOLIVIA 800 10 7260 www samsung com    HHP  4828210 cl support  BOSNIA 051 331 999 www samsung com   support  BOTSWANA 8007260000 www samsung com   support  0800 124 421  Demais cidadese www samsung com   regi  es  br support  BRAZIL pp  4004 0000  Capitais e grandes  centros   BULGARIA 800111 31   Be3nnatHa www samsung com   Tene  oHHa NUHUA bg support  BURUNDI 200 www samsung com   support  CAMEROON 7095  0077 www samsung com           africa_fr support       Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 320     Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    1 800 SAMSUNG  726 7864     WebSite    www samsung com   ca support English     Country Region    CYPRUS    Customer Care Center    8009 4000 only from landline  toll    free    WebSite    www samsung com   gr support          CZECH    800 SAMSUNG  800 726786     www samsung com   cz support 
139. g Menus 208    Fax    Item Description  Fax Feature  Sends a fax to multiple destinations  see  Sending a fax    to multiple destinations  on page 66               Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or Multi Send  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on K  You cannot send a color fax using this feature   page 31    Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  To change the menu options  will not be present  see  Delaying a fax transmission  on  page 251    e Press 45  fax   gt  IB   Menu  gt  Fax Feature on the control panel  Delay Send  K  You cannot send a color fax using this feature   Item Description          Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is  Darkness easier to read  when the original contains faint  markings and dark images  see  Darkness  on page 68      Scans the original into memory and immediately  transmits it when the current operation is finished   Priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple       The default document settings produce good results Priority Send destinations between stations  example  when the  when using typical text based originals  However  if you transmission to station A ends  before transmission to   Resolution send originals that are of poor quality  or contain station B begins  or between redial attempts  see  photographs  you can adjust the resolution to produce  Sending a priority fax  on page 253         a higher quality ta
140. g Printer Experience Pern sunod  machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection  SS AN mee       Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience          2  To open the application   3  From the Start screen  select the Samsung Printer Experience   id  tile   The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as    described in the following table   5  a   Printer This area gives you general information about your  Information machine  You can check information  such as the    machine   s status  location  IP address  and remaining  toner level        Quick Guide for Windows 8 User gg      Using Samsung Printer Experience    2   User Guide    You can view the online User s Guide  You need to be  connected to the Internet to use this feature     WA This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide  when an error occurs  You can directly open the  troubleshooting section in the user s guide                 Order  3 Supplies    Click on this button to order replacement toner  cartridges online  You need to be connected to the  Internet to use this feature        Visit Samsung    Links to Samsung printer website  You need to be  connected to the Internet to use this feature        Printer Settings    You can configure various machine settings such as  machine setup  paper  layout  emulation  networking     and print information through SyncThru   Web Service     Your machine needs to be connected to a network  This  button will be disabled if your m
141. g jammed paper in this  manual and troubleshoot accordingly  see  Clearing paper  jams  on page 101      Printouts are blurry     The toner level might be low or uneven  Shake the toner  cartridge  see  Redistributing toner  on page 79      Try a different print resolution setting  see  Opening printing  preferences  on page 54      Replace the toner cartridge  see  Replacing the toner  cartridge  on page 81      Where can   download the machine s driver     You can get help  support application  machine drivers   manuals  and order information from the Samsung website   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or  Downloads        About this user   s guide       This user s guide provides information for your basic understanding of the  machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage     Do not discard this manual  and keep it for future reference   Read the safety information before using the machine     If you have a problem using the machine  refer to the troubleshooting  chapter     Terms used in this user   s guide are explained in the glossary chapter     All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending  on its options or model you purchased     The screenshots in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine  depending on the machine s firmware driver version     The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows 7     Conventions    Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably  as below   
142. g on its options or models  Check your machine type  see   Front view  on page 20      To see paper weights for each sheet  refer to  Print media specifications  on                                        page 117   Types Tray   Plain     Thick     Thin     Bond a  Color     CardStock     Labels     Preprinted     Cotton     Recycled     Archive     Glossy Photo     Matte Photo          a  The paper types available manual feeding in tray      e  Supported  Blank  Not supported     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    Media and tray       Labels   Donotruna sheet of labels through the machine more than once  The   adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine   To avoid damaging the machine  use only labels designed for use in laser   Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled   printers  bubbled  or otherwise damaged        When selecting labels  consider the following factors     Card stock  Custom sized paper       Adhesives  Should be stable at your machine   s fusing temperature  about 170  C  338  F      Arrangement  Only use labels with no exposed backing between them  e Inthe software application  set the margins to at least 6 4 mm  0 25 inches   Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels  causing away from the edges of the material   serious jams        Curl  Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction     Condition  Do not use labels with wrinkles  bubbles  or other  indi
143. ge 20                  Press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray  pull the tray out manually     1 Pull out the paper tray  see  Tray overview  on page 39   Then adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide           Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  loading papers           2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup ao    Media and tray    5 Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up  For paper longer than Legal sized  press and unlatch the guide lock in  the tray  pull the tray out manually  Then adjust the paper length guide  and paper width guide        For paper smaller than Letter sized  press and unlatch the guide lock in  the tray  push the tray in manually  Then adjust the paper length guide  and paper width guide              Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp              e Do not use a paper with a leading edge curl  it may cause a paper jam or  the paper can be wrinkled     e If you do not adjust the paper width guide  it may cause paper jams     O Xx x  ca   Ca                                     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI    Media and tray    6 Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack 8 Insert the paper tray   without causing it to bend           7 Close the paper cover   When you print a document  set the paper type and size for the tray  see   Setting the paper size and type  on page 46      The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size  dep
144. ge Orientation    From your Mac application  select Print from the File menu   c  a    E    Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation     Select a binding orientation from the Two Sided option     Select the other options to use     If you print more than 2 copies  the first copy and the second copy might  print on the same sheet of paper  Avoid printing on both sides of paper  when you are printing more than 1 copy     1   2   3   4   5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper   A    4  Special Features 238    Printing features    Some features may not be available depending on models or options  It  means that the features are not supported        Printing from applications       There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX  Printing System  CUPS   You can print on your machine from any such  application     1 Open the document to print     2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup  Print Setup for some    applications      3 Choose your paper size  orientation  and make    sure that your machine is selected  Click Apply   4 Open the File menu and click Print     Select your machine to print     Ul    6 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print     7 Change other printing options in each tab  if necessary     Click Print     CO    2 Automatic duplex printing may not be available depending on models  You  can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd   even
145. ge until installation    if original packaging is not available  cover the top opening of the cartridge  with paper and store in a dark cabinet     Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf  and operating life  Do not store on the floor  If the toner cartridge is removed  from the printer  follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge    properly      Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package        Store lying flat  not standing on end  with the same side facing up as if it  were installed in the machine     e Donot store consumables in any of the following conditions     Temperature greater than 40  C  104  F      Humidity range less than 20  or greater than 80      An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature     Direct sunlight or room light     Dusty places     Acarfora long period of time     An environment where corrosive gases are present       An environment with salty air     Handling instructions    e Donot expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock     Toner cartridge usage    Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung  brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic  store brand  refilled  or  remanufactured toner cartridges     Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused  by the use ofa refilled  remanufactured  or non Samsung brand toner  cartridges     Estimated cartridge life    Est
146. ger than You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for  216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches   copying  scanning  and sending a fax     Do not attempt to load the following s of paper  in order to prevent paper    Jam  Jow prini quality and machine damage  KU Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending      Carbon paper or carbon backed paper on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on  page 20                 Coated paper    Onion skin or thin paper    Wrinkled or creased paper    On the scanner glass    Curled or rolled paper         Torn paper Using the scanner glass  you can copy or scan originals  You can get the best  scan quality  especially for colored or gray scaled images  Make sure that no  originals are in the document feeder  If an original is detected in the document  feeder  the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass     Remove all staples and paper clips before loading     Make sure any glue  ink  or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry  before loading     Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper     Do not load booklets  pamphlets  transparencies  or documents with other  unusual characteristics     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 48    Media and tray    1 Lift and open the scanner lid  2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass  Align it with the  registration guide at the top left corner of the glass  
147. ght   exposure   If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting  do     This machine s power reception device is the power cord  not lift the machine  Ask for help  and always use the appropriate  To switch off the power supply  remove the power cord from the amount of people to lift the device safely   electrical outlet  Then lift the machine        e Ifthe machine weighs under 20 kg  44 09 Ibs   lift with 1 person   e Ifthe machine weighs 20 kg  44 09 Ibs    40kg  88 18 Ibs   lift    Installation   Moving with 2 people   If the machine weighs more than 40 kg  88 18 Ibs   lift with 4 or                         more people   A Warning The machine could fall  causing injury or machine damage   Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place  the machine  Also consider the space required to open the cover  Do not place the machine in an area with dust  humidity  or water and trays   leaks          The place should be well ventilated and be far from direct light   This could result in electric shock or fire  heat  and humidity   Place the machine in the environment where it meets the D NT When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a  operating temperature and humidity specification  Otherwise  HA large number of pages in a non ventilated space  it could pollute  quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine  see the air and be harmful to your health  Place the machine in a well    General specifications  on page 115
148. gs     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 161    Wireless network setup    Using the WPS button    If your machine and an access point  or wireless router  support Wi Fi Protected  Setup     WPS   you can easily configure the wireless network settings by    pressing the 63  WPS  button on the control panel without a computer     r    Ifyou want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode    4 make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine   Using the WPS  PBC  button or entering the PIN from the computer to  connect to the access point  or wireless router  varies depending on the  access point  or wireless router  you are using  Refer to the user s guide  of the access point  or wireless router  you are using              When using the WPS button to set the wireless network  security settings  may change  To prevent this  lock the WPS option for the current wireless  security settings  The option name may differ depending on the access  point  or wireless router  you are using     Items to prepare       Check if the access point  or wireless router  supports Wi Fi Protected  Setup     WPS      Check if your machine supports Wi Fi Protected Setup     WPS      Networked computer  PIN mode only     Choosing your type       There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network    using the  3  WPS  button on the control panel     The Push Button Configuration  PBC  method allows you to connect your    machine to a wirele
149. gt   Address Book   gt  New amp Edit  gt  Speed Dial on  the control panel     Enter a speed dial number and press OK     If an entry is already stored in the number you choose  the display shows the  message to allow you to change it  To start over with another speed dial    number  press 4   Back      Enter the name you want and press OK   Enter the fax number you want and press OK     Press the  Cancel or Stop Clear  button to return to ready mode        Using speed dial numbers    When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax   enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want               2    Fora one digit  0 9  speed dial number  press and hold the    corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2  seconds     e Fora two  or three digit speed dial number  press the first digit button s   and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds    e You can print the address book list by selecting pi  fax  5      Address Book   gt  Print     Editing speed dial numbers    1    uu BF WN    Select A5  fax   gt      Address Book   gt  New amp Edit  gt  Speed Dial on  the control panel     Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK   Change the name and press OK   Change the fax number and press OK     Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     4  Special Features 226      Setting up the fax address book    Registering a group dial number       N       N Aa UW Kb     oe     Se
150. he list    Select the printer settings  such as the number of copies and orientation     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User ga    Using Samsung Printer Experience       5 Click the Print button to start the print job  Opening more settings       KU The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or  options        You can set up more printing parameters     Open the document you want to print     From the Charms  select Devices        1  2  3 Select your printer from the list  4    Click More settings     Cancelling a print job       If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler  cancel the job as  follows     You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon    i      cya  in the Windows task bar     You can also cancel the current job by pressing  Cancel or Stop Clear     button on the control panel     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 313    Using Samsung Printer Experience       Basic tab Advanced tab       Samsung Printer Experience    Samsung Printer Experience    Advanced       Basic Paper settings    This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies  This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications     orientation  and document type  Layout settings    Eco settings This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents     This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User go    Using Samsung Printer 
151. he machine     Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly  Check that the original is the right size  not too thick  or thin     e Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed     e The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced  Contact a service representative  see  Available maintenance parts  on  page 77         Faxes are not received  automatically     e The receiving mode should be set to fax  see  Changing the receive modes  on page 255    e Make sure that there is paper in the tray  see  Print media specifications  on page 117      e Check to see if the display shows any error message  If it does  clear the problem        The machine does not send     Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass     e Check the fax machine you are sending to  to see if it can receive your fax        The incoming fax has blank  spaces or is of poor quality        The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty      A noisy phone line can cause line errors   e Check your machine by making a copy     e Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life  Replace the toner cartridge  see  Replacing the toner cartridge     on page 81    6  Troubleshooting 293    Faxing problems    Condition    Some of the words on an  incoming fax are stretched     Suggested solutions    The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam        There are lines on the originals  you sent     C
152. he size of the original  This feature is helpful  Reduce Enlarge for copying a small sized item such as business card        KA If the machine is set to Eco mode  reduce and  enlarge features are not available                 3  Useful Setting Menus 206     Copy       Item    Adjust Bkgd       Description    Prints an image without its background  This copy  feature removes the background color and can be  helpful when copying an original containing color in  the background  such as a newspaper or a catalog   e Off  Does not use this feature   Auto  Optimizes the background   Enhance Lev 1 2  The higher the number is  the  more vivid the background is     Erase Lev 1 4  The higher the number is  the lighter  the background is     Copy Setup    KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or    Models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31         To change the menu options     In copy mode  press 23   Menu   gt  Copy Setup on the control panel          C46xW  When the Scan to button s LED is off  the machine is in copy     mode              e C46xFW  Press  copy  on the control panel        Item Description    Resets the value or setting to the printer   s out of box  Change Default g P          state   Change Default  gt  You can enter the number of copies using the number  Copies keypad     3  Useful Setting Menus    Copy    Item    Change Default  gt   Copy Collation    Description    Set the machine to sort the co
153. he software without connecting the printer  7 Encryption  Select the encryption  None WEP64 WEP1 28    Go Ba PAA e Network Password  Enter the encryption network password value     e Confirm Network Password  Confirm the encryption network  password value     e WEP Key Index  If you are using WEP Encryption  select the appropriate  WEP Key Index     The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network  has security setting     Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next     e WEP  Wired Equivalent Privacy  is a security protocol preventing  unauthorized access to your wireless network  WEP encrypts the data  portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit  or 128 bit WEP encryption key     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 181     Wireless network setup    12 The window showing the wireless network settings appears  Check the    2       settings and click Next     Before entering the IP address for the machine  you must know the  computer s network configuration information  If the computer s network  configuration is set to DHCP  the wireless network setting should also be  DHCP  Likewise  if the computer s network configuration is set to Static  the  wireless network setting should also be Static     If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network  setting  you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP  address       For the DHCP method  If the IP address assign
154. heck your scan unit for marks and clean it  see  Cleaning the scan unit  on page 92         The machine dials a number   but the connection with the  other fax machine fails     The other fax machine may be turned off  out of paper  or cannot answer incoming calls  Soeak with the other machine operator and  ask them to solve the problem on their side        Faxes do not store in memory     There may not be enough memory space to store the fax  If the display indicating the memory status shows  delete any faxes you no  longer need from the memory  and then try to store the fax again  Call for service        Blank areas appear at the  bottom of each page or on  other pages  with a small strip  of text at the top        You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting  Check the paper size and type again     6  Troubleshooting 294     Operating system problems    Condition       File in Use    message appears  during installation     Suggested solutions    Exit all software applications  Remove all software from the startup group  then restart Windows  Reinstall the printer driver           General Protection Fault         Exception OE        Spool 32     or     Illegal Operation    messages  appear     Close all other applications  reboot Windows and try printing again           Fail To Print        A printer  timeout error occurred     message appear        These messages may appear during printing  Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing  
155. hentication  and encryption  making it a much more capable and  secure printing solution than older ones     IPX SPX       The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization  established to standardize and regulate international radio and  telecommunications  Its main tasks include standardization  allocation of the  radio spectrum  and organizing interconnection arrangements between  different countries to allow international phone calls  A  T out of ITU T indicates  telecommunication     ITU T No  1 chart       Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile  transmissions     JBIG       IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange  It is a  networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems  IPX and  SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP  with the IPX protocol  having similarities to IP  and SPX having similarities to TCP  IPX SPX was  primarily designed for local area networks  LANs   and is a very efficient protocol  for this purpose  typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN      ISO       The International Organization for Standardization  ISO  is an international  standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards  bodies  It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards        Joint Bi level Image Experts Group  JBIG  is an image compression standard with  no loss of accuracy or quality  which was designed for compression 
156. her and an access point  router     Software CD that was provided with your machine    e A machine installed with a wireless network interface    WA While setting the wireless network  the machine uses PC s wireless LAN  You  might not be able to connect to the Internet              Creating the infrastructure network  1 Turn on your computer  access point  and machine     2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive              If the installation window does not appear  click Start  gt  All programs  gt   Accessories  gt  Run     X  Setup exe replacing    X    with the letter  which represents your CD   ROM drive and click OK     Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type  screen  Then  click Next     1  Welcome  2 Connecting Printers Printer Connection Type  Pp Raa Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network     3  Select Software    4  Installation       USB connection    Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable        Network connection   Connect the printer to the same network as this computer    If your printer is already connected to the network  the installer will detect the printer     Wireless network connection   Connect the printer to the same wireless network as this computer     If your printer is not connected to the wireless network  the installer will help you set up the wireless  network  
157. her color depth gives a broader  range of distinct colors  As the number of bits increases  the number of possible  colors becomes impractically large for a color map  1 bit color is commonly  called as monochrome or black and white     BMP       A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  graphics subsystem  GDI   and used commonly as a simple graphics file format  on that platform     Glossary gg    Glossary    BOOTP    Coverage          Bootstrap Protocol  A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP  address automatically  This is usually done in the bootstrap process of  computers or operating systems running on them  The BOOTP servers assign  the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client  BOOTP enables  diskless  workstation    computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced  operating system     CCD       Charge Coupled Device  CCD  is a hardware which enables the scan job  CCD  Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage  when you move the machine     Collation    It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing  For  example  5  coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5  image or text  on it  So  if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it  the  coverage will be higher and at the same time  a toner usage will be as much as  the coverage     CSV       Comma Separated Values  CSV   A type of file format  CSV is used 
158. hine    1    2       EN    Connect the machine to the electricity supply first     Turn the switch on if the machine has a power switch        Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending  on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on  page 20      Power is turned on automatically     For C46xW  press      Power Wakeup  button on the control panel     If you want to turn the power off  press and hold      Power Wakeup     button for about 3 seconds     1  Introduction      Installing the driver locally    A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer 4 Follow the instructions in the installation window   using the cable  If your machine is attached to a network  skip the following  steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine   s driver  see      You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install     Installing driver over the network  on page 151   Lp     Window             Ifyouarea Mac or Linux operating systems user  refer to the  Installation     for Mac  on page 142 or  Installation for Linux  on page 144              e Theinstallation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the  machine and interface in use     e Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters  118 inches      1 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive     If the installation window does not appear  click Start  gt  All programs  gt   Accessories  gt  Run
159. hine   button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window     Remove Printer  Removes the selected machine     Printers configuration    Prirdors   Classes      e e Stop Start  Stops starts the machine   amg    Set as Default  Sets the current selected machine as a default machine        Test  Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working  properly     Properties  Allows you to view and change the printer s properties      3  serectes printer   Local printer idie              5  Useful Management Tools    Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator    Classes tab       Ports configuration    In this window  you can view the list of available ports  check the status of each  Unified Driver Configurator  naia angaa e aaaea port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has  Parte   iassos   terminated the job for any reason   Retesh      Aga Class    Remove Class      Set as Detauit      The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes     Configurator  Port configuraton       s Refresh   e e e L zeaz  Release port   MevirdpO Adevimip  Mevinip2 idevmip3 _Ratease port      BG BaBG _uo    BRENT  icevimip5 evimips cevimtp7 Help  ERER L    evimtps Aevimtp  dovimipio Mowmiptt              2 class   State  idle    Primers in class               3   Selected port         Port typo  USB Device   Port is unused          1   Shows all of the machine classes     2   Shows the status of the class and the number of machines 
160. hines that do not support the network interface will not be able to use  this feature  see  Rear view  on page 22      Printing a network configuration report       You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network  configuration report        See  Printing a network configuration report  on page 148     IP setting using SetIP Program  Windows        Your machine is a network compatible machine  To enable your machine to  work with your network  you will need to perform some configuration    This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine  procedures     using its MAC address to communicate with the machine  The MAC address is  the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the    2 e After completing the wireless network connection  you need to install a Network Configuration Report   4 machine driver to print from an application  see  Installing driver over  the network  on page 151         See  Setting IP address  on page 148     e See your network administrator  or the person that set up your wireless    network  for information about your network configuration  E i    P  d a Configuring the machine s wireless network       Before starting you will need to know the network name  SSID  of your wireless       Items to prepare network and the network key if it is encrypted  This information was set when  the access point  or wireless router  was installed  If you do not know about your  Access poi
161. icate directly with  each other in a peer to peer environment       Infrastructure  Allows wireless devices to communicate with  each other through an access point     4 If it   s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to  log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and password   We recommend you to change the default password for security  reasons     ID admin 2 If your network s Operation Mode is Infrastructure  select the SSID of the  access point  If the Operation Mode is Ad hoc  select the machine   s SSID                Password  sec00000    5 When the SyncThru   Web Service window opens  click Network 8 Click Next     Settings  If the wireless security setting window appears  enter the registered          password  network password  and click Next   6 Click Wireless  gt  Wizard     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 184     Wireless network setup    The confirmation window appears  please check your wireless setup  If 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru    Web Service website   the setup is right  click Apply    4 If it s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to   log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and password     A Disconnect the network cable  standard or network   Your machine should We recommend you to change the default password for security  then start communicating wirelessly with the network  In case of Ad hoc reasons     mode  you can use a wireless LAN and wired
162. iginal paper jam inside of scanner           Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20               e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Variety feature  on page 10      4  Troubleshooting EI     Clearing original document jams                                  4  Troubleshooting  ao    Clearing original document jams       Original paper jam in exit area of scanner           Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20               e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Front view  on page 20      1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder     2 Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder                 4  Troubleshooting 100    Clearing paper jams    KA To avoid tearing the paper  pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently        x  we    Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam     K Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20               4  Troubleshooting 101    ing paper jams     Clear                   4  Troubleshooting 102     Clearing paper jams    Inside the machine    x  oe       gt   Click this link t
163. imated cartridge life  the life of the toner cartridge yield  depends on the  amount of toner that print jobs require  The actual print yield may vary  depending on the print density of the pages you print on  operating  environment  percentage of image area  printing interval  media type and or  media size  For example  if you print a lot of graphics  the consumption of the  toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often     3  Maintenance    j Redistributing toner    When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life   e White streaks or light printing occurs and or density varies from side to side   e The Status LED blinks red  The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display     e The computer s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner  see  Using Samsung  Printer Status  on page 271      If this happens  you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge  In some cases  white streaks or light printing will still  occur even after you have redistributed the toner     KA Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20         A e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package  They might scratch the drum of the cartridge     If toner gets on your clothing  wi
164. in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies  see  Changing the settings for each copy  on page  58         Smears  lines  marks  or spots     If the defects are on the original  adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies   appear on copies    Adjust background in copy setup removes the background color  see  Adjust Bkgd  on page 207      e If there are no defects on the original  clean the scan unit  see  Cleaning the scan unit  on page 92         Copy image is skewed  e Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide       The transfer roller may be dirty  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89         Blank copies print out  Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder     If these steps do not correct the problem  contact a service representative        Image rubs off the copy easily  Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package     e In high humidity areas  do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time        Frequent copy paper jams e Fan the paper  then turn it over in the tray  Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply  Check adjust the paper guides  if  occur  necessary     e Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight  see  Print media specifications  on page 117      e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared    
165. in the class           1  Switches to Ports configuration        Refresh  Renews the classes list  2   Shows all of the available ports        Add Class  Allows you to add a new machine class  3   Shows the port type  device connected to the port  and status        Remove Class  Removes the selected machine class  Refresh  Renews the available ports list     Release port  Releases the selected port     5  Useful Management Tools    6  Troubleshooting    This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error     Paper feeding problems 277  Power and cable connecting problems 278  Printing problems 279  Printing quality problems 283  Copying problems 291  Scanning problems 292  Faxing problems 293  Operating system problems 295    WA For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings  refer to the  troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter  see  Troubleshooting  on page 188                  Paper feeding problems       Condition Suggested solutions  Paper jams during printing  Clear the paper jam   Paper sticks together  e Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray     e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper   e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper     e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together        Multiple sheets of paper do not feed  Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray  Load paper of only one type  size  and weight        Paper does not feed in
166. ine detail  Super Fine  mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are  communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution     For memory transmission  Super Fine mode is not available  The  resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine     When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine  with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine  resolution  the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode  supported by the other fax machine     Photo Fax  Originals containing shades of gray or photographs     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    I Basic faxing    Darkness       You can select the degree of darkness of the original document     KU The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job  To change the default      setting  see  Fax  on page 209               1 Select ae  fax   gt  KE  Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Darkness on the control  panel     2 Select a darkness level you want     3 Press    stop Clear  to return to ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 68    Using USB memory device       This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine     Plugging in a USB memory device  About USB memory Lift the scanner lid slightly and insert your USB memory device into the USB    memory port  Close the scanner lid again before using the device     USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give  you more room for st
167. ine is connected via a cable  A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using  the cable  If your machine is attached to a network  skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network  connected machine s driver  see  Installing driver over the network  on page 151      Installation for Mac 142  Reinstallation for Mac 143  Installation for Linux 144  Reinstallation for Linux 145    r     Ifyou are a Windows OS user  refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine   s driver  see      Installing the driver locally  on page 28               e Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter  118 inches         Installation for Mac    O N QAU A    Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop   For Mac OS X 10 8  double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder     Double click the MAC_Installer folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   Click Continue    Read the license agreement and click Continue    Click Agree to agree to the license agreement     Click Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  installed     If you click Customize  you can choose individual components to install     Enter the password and click OK     10    11       Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and  click Continue     Click Add Printer button to select your printer a
168. ing on the need for data security   Shared Key  Authentication is used  A device that has a proper WEP key  can access the network   WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal  Select this option to authenticate the  print server based on the WPA Pre Shared Key  This uses a shared secret  key  generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase  that is manually  configured on the access point and each of its clients    e Encryption  Select the encryption   None  WEP64  WEP128  TKIP  AES   TKIP  AES     e Network Password  Enter the encryption network password value     e Confirm Network Password  Confirm the encryption network  password value     e WEP Key Index  If you are using WEP Encryption  select the appropriate  WEP Key Index     The wireless network security window appears when the access point has  security enabled     Enter the Network Password of the access point  or router      13             14  15    The window showing the wireless network setting appears  Check the  settings and click Next     e Wi Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports  this feature     e Can start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager   see  Setting up Wi Fi Direct  on page 186        Wi Fi Direct Name  The default Wi Fi Direct Name is the model name  and the maximum length is 22 characters     e Password setting is the numeric string  and the size is 8   64 characters     The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears  Click Next     When the wireless ne
169. ing several s of equipment on the same telephone  line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls  especially  ringing when your line is called  The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of  the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure  proper service from the telephone company  In some cases  a sum of five may  not be usable on your line  If any of your telephone equipment is not operating  properly  you should immediately remove it from your telephone line  asitmay YOU should also know that   cause harm to the telephone network     a promptly notify the customer   b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem     c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal  Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC  Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68        e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system   The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements    adopted by the ACTA  On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains  e If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone    among other information  a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ  TXXXX  line as your machine  you may experience transmission and reception  problems with all the equipment  It is recommended that no other    equipment  except for a regular telephone  share the line with your  machine     If requested  this n
170. inting a network configuration report  on page 183      If you want to install Samsung   s printer management tools  you need to  install them using the supplied software CD  see  From the Desktop  Screen  on page 304      You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  Store  You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store    1 From Charms  select Search    2 Click Store    3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience    4 Click Install     5 The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 305    j Installing the driver over the network    From the Desktop Screen    KA If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  you cannot use the  installed driver from the Start screen        1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  on  Also  your machine s IP address should have been set  see  Setting IP  address  on page 148      2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive     If the installation window does not appear  from Charms  select Search   gt  Apps and search for Run  Type in X  Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK     A  it    Tap to choose what happens with this disc     pop up window appears   click the window and select Run Setup exe              3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     4 Select Network connection on the Printer Con
171. irect from the printer  refer to the user manual of the  mobile device you are using to set its Wi Fi Direct     After setting up Wi Fi Direct  you need to download the mobile printing  application  For example  Samsung Mobile printer  to print from your  smartphone     K e When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your  mobile device  select the printer and the printer s LED will blink  Press the  WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile  device     If your mobile device does not support WPS  you need to enter the     Network Key    of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    Connecting Failure   General Connection Error    Troubleshooting e Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine  Check the USB    cable and your machine   s power     Problems during setup or driver installation       Connecting Failure   Connected Wired Network    Your machine is connected with a wired network cable  Remove the wired  network cable from your machine     Printers Not Found    Your machine may not be turned on  Turn on your computer and the    machine  Connecting Failure   Assigning the IP address    USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine  Connect    f f Cycle the power for th int  or wireless r r  and machine   the machine to your computer using the USB cable  y powe TOM ea ecess pani Wwitcl ess Touren andmachine    The machine does not s
172. is chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations     e Specifications    e Regulatory information    e Copyright       Specifications    General specifications             KU The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice  See www samsung com for possible changes in information              Items Description  Dimension Width x Length x Height C46xW 406 x 362 x 288 6 mm  16 x 14 3 x 11 4 inches   C46xFW 406 x 362 x 333 5 mm  16 x 14 3 x 13 1 inches   Weight Machine with consumables C46xW 12 80 Kg  28 22 Ibs   C46xFW 13 96 Kg  30 78 Ibs                                      Noise Level   Ready mode background noise level  Print mode Color printing Less than 46 dB  A   Black and white printing Less than 48 dB  A   Copy mode Scanner glass Less than 52 dB  A   Document feeder Less than 53 dB  A   Scan mode Scanner glass Less than 51 dB  A   Document feeder Less than 51 dB  A   Temperature Operation 10 to 30  C  50 to 86  F   Storage  packed   20 to 40  C   4 to 104  F           5  Appendix 115    Specifications                         Items Description     Humidity  i Operation 20 to 80  RH  Storage  packed  10 to 90  RH  Power rating    110 volt models AC 110 127V  220 volt models AC 220   240V  Power consumption 4 Average operating mode Less than 290 W  Ready mode Less than 60 W  Power save mode e C46xW  Less than 1 7 W  Wi Fi Direct on  Less than 2 5 W     e C46xFW  Less than 2 1 W  Wi Fi Direct on  Less tha
173. is option     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 186    Wireless network setup      Network Password  If your printer is a Group Owner  a Network  Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your  printer  You can configure a network password yourself  or can  remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by  default     From the machine  Machines with a display screen   Select Network  gt  Wireless  gt  Wi Fi Direct from the control panel     Enable Wi Fi Direct     From the machine  Machines without a display screen     48  Press and hold the o  WPS  button on the control panel for about 10  15  seconds  Wi Fi Direct feature turns on     Press and hold the o  WPS  button on the control panel for more than 15  seconds  Wi Fi Direct feature turns off     From the network connected computer    If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point  you can enable  and configure Wi Fi Direct from SyncThru   Web Service     Access SyncThru   Web Service  select Settings 5 Network Settings 5  Wireless  gt  Wi Fi Direct     Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct and set other options     2 e For Linux OS users       Print an IP network configuration report to check the output  see   Printing a network configuration report  on page 148           Access SyncThru Web Service  select Settings  gt  Network Settings   gt  Wireless  gt  Wi Fi Direct       Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct     Setting up the mobile device       After setting up Wi Fi D
174. is option set to on   Key Sound      a tone sounds each time a key is pressed   Turns the alarm sound on or off  With this option set to  Alarm Sound on  an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax  communication ends     Ringer          Adjusts the ringer volume  For the ringer volume  you can  select off  low  middle  and high level     3  Useful Setting Menus 218    Item Description  Report  Prints a transmission report including the fax    number  the number of pages  the elapsed time  of the job  the communication mode  and the  Fax Confirm  communication results for fax job  You can set up  your machine to automatically print a  transmission confirmation report after each fax  job     Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31            To change the menu options  Prints information on the faxes you have recently    sent     Fax Sent         Press EF   Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Report on the control panel       Prints information on the faxes you have recently  Fax Received                            received   Item Description  Prints the document list currently stored for    i Prints a report on the machine s overall i i i  Configuration   p Schedule Jobs delayed faxes along with the starting time and  configuration  type of each operation   Supplies Info  Prints supplies    information page  nE Prints the fax numbers specified as junk fax  u  Prints th
175. ist  Edit Overlay window appears   Overlay In the Edit Overlay window  click Create     In the Save As window  type a name in the File name box  Select the destination path  if necessary  The default is C  Formover    Click Save  The name appears on the Overlay List    Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window    The file is not printed  Instead  it is stored on your computer hard disk drive      Creating a new page  overlay     Dan TO       4  Special Features 235    Printing features    Item Description    a Click the Advanced tab   b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list     c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop down list  select Edit    from the list and click Load  Select the overlay file you  want to use   If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source  you can also load the file when you access the Open window   After you select the file  click Open  The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing  Select the overlay from the Overlay  List box     d If necessary  check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box  If this box is checked  a message window appears each time you submit a  document for printing  asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document     Overlay     Using a page overlay     If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected  the overlay automatically prints with your document   Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window     m 
176. k must be non flammable and should not adversely some models     affect machine rollers     Before you load preprinted paper  verify that the ink on the paper is dry   During the fusing process  wet ink can come off preprinted paper  reducing  print quality     Select NE  Menu  button on the control panel   Press System Setup  gt  Paper Setup  gt  Paper Size or Paper Type   Select the tray and the option you want     Press OK to save the selection     A W N      2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    Media and tray    5 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode           Ifyou want to use special sized paper such as billing paper  select the     Paper tab  gt  Size  gt  Edit    and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the  Printing Preferences  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54               Using the output support    K The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number  of pages at once  Make sure that you do not touch the surface  and do not  allow children near it              The printed pages stack on the output support  and the output support will help  the printed pages to align  The printer sends output to the output tray by  default                 page 20         K Illustrations on this user   s guide may differ from your machine depending  on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on    2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup     Media and tray    Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm  5 6 x 5 8 inches  or lar
177. lect 45  fax   gt      Address Book   gt  New amp Edit  gt  Group Dial on  the control panel     Enter a group dial number and press OK   If an entry is already stored in the number you choose  the display shows the    message to allow you to change it  To start over with another speed dial  number  press 4   Back      Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial   s name to put in  the group    Select the name and number you want and press OK    Select Yes when Add  appears    Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group     When you have finished  select No when Another No   appears and  press OK     Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Editing group dial numbers    1    W    N Aa wl A    Select 45  fax   gt      Address Book   gt  New amp Edit  gt  Group Dial on  the control panel     Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK     Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK  then Add  appears     Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK  Delete   appears     Press OK to add or delete the number   Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers   Select No at the Another No   and press OK     Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     4  Special Features    Setting up the fax address book    There are two ways to search for a number in memory  You can either scan from  A to Z sequentially  or you can search by entering the first letters of the name  associated with the num
178. lect HP Jetdirect   Socket in Protocol    Enter the machine   s IP address in the Address input field    Enter the queue name in the Queue input field  If you cannot determine  the queue name for your machine server  try using the default queue    first     If Auto Select does not work properly  choose Select Printer Software  and your machine name in Print Using     Click Add     After the installation is finished  click Close     To install the fax driver    a Open the Applications folder  gt  Samsung  gt  Fax Queue Creator   b Your machine appears on the Printer List    c Select machine to use and Click Create button     You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  install the printer software  http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt   Support or Downloads      Install the Linux driver and add network printer       1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  on  Also  your machine   s IP address should have been set     Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website   Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz file and open the new directory   Double click the cdroot  gt  autorun   The Samsung installer window opens  Click Next    The add printer wizard window opens  Click Next    Select network printer and click Search button    The machine   s IP address and model name appears on list field     Select your machine and click Next     O ON A UU BW N    2  Using a Network Connected Machine 154 
179. less device will void the authorization to use it   Contact manufacturer for service     FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use        While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination  the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W cm2 may be exceeded at  distances close to the antenna installed  Therefore  the user must maintain  a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times  This device  cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna     Russia   Kazakhstan   Belarus only       EAL    Vsrotopytenb  eCaMcyHr InekTpoHukc Ko   JITA      M  taH goHr  129  CamcyHr po  EHITOHT Ty  r  CyBou  K  xrv go  Pecny6nuka Kopesa    Vmnoptep  OOO   CamcyHr InektpoHurc Pyc KomnaHu    Anpec  125009  r  Mockea  yn  Bo3n8WxeHka 10    CamcyHr 3nektpoHukc Ko  JITA    MaTaH FoHr  129  CamcyHr po  EHrTOHr ry  CyBou K   K  Hrn go  Kopea Pecny6nnkacbi     CAMCYHT 3MEKTPOHNKC K3 OHO LIEHTPAN     XKA   XKLUC   3aHgbi MekeH Xkahbi Ka3akcTaH Pecny6nukacbl  AnmaTbi K   On  apabn AaHFbinbl  36  3 4 KabaTTap       Germany only    Das Ger  t ist nicht f  r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz  gem     BildscharbV vorgesehen     Turkey only    e RoHS    EEE Y  netmeli  ine Uygundur   This EEE is compliant with RoHS     e Bu   r  n  n ortalama ya  am s  resi 7 y  l  garanti suresi 2 yildir     Thailand only       This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement     5  Appendix 129    Regulatory information    Canada only    This product 
180. lication that combines Samsung  machine settings into one location  Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines  device settings as well as printing environments  settings actions and  launching  All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your  Samsung machine  Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user  interfaces for the user to choose from  the basic user interface and the advanced  user interface  Switching between the two interfaces is easy  just click a button     samung Easy Printer Manager    1    Supplies    Toner Toner ID    Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager       6 Order Supplies    To open the program  a       For Windows   Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your  1 computer and network printers added by network  discovery  Windows only      Select Start  gt  Programs or All Programs  gt  Samsung Printers  gt  Samsung  Easy Printer Manager      For Mac     Open the Applications folder  gt  Samsung folder  gt  Samsung Easy Printer  Manager     5  Useful Management Tools      Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager    Printer  information    This area gives you general information about your  machine  You can checkinformation  such as the machine   s  model name  IP address  or Port name   and machine  status     A You can view the online User   s Guide              Troubleshooting button  This button opens the  Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs   You can directly open the necessary section in the  user
181. ller leaves a message  the answering machine  stores the message  If your machine detects a fax tone on the line  it  automatically starts to receive the fax           Ifyou have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine     is switched off  or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket   your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined  number of rings              e Ifthe answering machine has a user selectable ring counter  set the  machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring     e Ifthe machine is in Tel mode  disconnect or switch off the answering  machine with the fax machine  Otherwise  the outgoing message from  the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation     When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket  you  can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone   without going to the fax machine     When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones  press the  keys  9  on the extension phone  The machine receives the fax      9  js the remote receive code preset at the factory  The first and the last  asterisks are fixed  but you can change the middle number to whatever you  want     While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket  copy  and scan features are not available        Receiving faxes using DRPD mode    This setting may not be available depending on your country  Distinctive Ring is  a telephone company service which 
182. lso be modified without prior notice        Understanding the screen    Windows 8 provides both the new Start screen mode and the Desktop screen mode of the existing OS     Start Screen Desktop Screen                Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 301    i System requirements    Operating  system    Windows   8    Requirement  recommended     CPU    Intel   Pentium   IV 1 GHz 32 bit  or 64 bit processor or higher       RAM    1 GB  2 GB        Free HDD  Space    16 GB            Support for DirectX   9 graphics with 128 MB memory  to    enable the Aero theme    DVD R W Drive    Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 302    Installing the driver locally    A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer   using the cable        Ifyou want to install Samsung s printer management tools  you need to  install them using the supplied software CD  see  From the Desktop  Screen  on page 304                        WA e Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters  118 inches     You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  e Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen Store  You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store   when V4 driver is installed  The V4 driver is automatically downloaded 1 From Charms  select Search   from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet  2 Click Store     If not  you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website     3 Search and click Samsung P
183. ly come from scanners  TIFF  images make use of tags  keywords defining the characteristics of the image that  is included in the file  This flexible and platform independent format can be  used for pictures that have been made by various image processing  applications     Toner Cartridge       A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains  toner  Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers  which forms  the text and images on the printed paper  Toner can be fused by a combination  of heat pressure from the fuser  causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper     Glossary    Glossary    TWAIN    Watermark       An industry standard for scanners and software  By using a TWAIN compliant  scanner with a TWAIN compliant program  a scan can be initiated from within  the program  It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac  operating systems     UNC Path       Uniform Naming Convention  UNC  is a standard way to access network shares  in Window NT and other Microsoft products  The format of a UNC path is      lt servername gt   lt sharename gt   lt Additional directory gt     URL       Uniform Resource Locator  URL  is the global address of documents and  resources on the Internet  The first part of the address indicates what protocol to  use  the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the  resource is located     USB       Universal Serial Bus  USB  is a standard that was developed by the USB  
184. match occurs  the  machine continues printing     e Off  If a paper mismatch occurs  the machine waits  until you insert the correct paper        used copy settings  After the timeout  the machine  restores the default copy settings        Job Timeout    Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing  the last page of a print job that does not end with a  command to print the page     Paper Substit        Altitude Adj     Automatically substitutes the printer driver s paper size  to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4   For example  if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set  the paper size to Letter in the printer driver  the machine  prints on A4 paper and vice versa        Optimize print quality according to the machine s    altitude  PrintBlankPage       Humidity       Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the  environment        The printer detects the printing data from computer  whether a page is empty or not  You can set to print or  skip the blank page     3  Useful Setting Menus 216      System setup       Item    Eco Settings       Description    Allows you to save print resources and enables eco    friendly printing    e Default Mode  Select whether to turn the Eco mode  on or off     KA On force  On Forced   Sets the Eco mode on with  password  If a user wants to turn the Eco mode  on off  the user needs to enter the password              e Select Template  Selects the eco template set from  the SyncThru    Web Service    
185. may not appear in the display depending on options or more options to be set   models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine        Alert Settings  Windows only        Device Settings This menu includes settings related to error alerting        You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup  paper  e Printer Alert  Provides settings related to when alerts will be received     layout  emulation  network  and print information    Email Alert  Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email     Alert History  Provides a history of device and toner related alerts     Scan to PC Settings       This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles     Scan Activation  Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the  device     Basic tab  Contains settings related to general scan and device settings     Image tab  Contains settings related to image altering     5  Useful Management Tools 269    Using Samsung Easy Document Creator    Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan  compile   and save documents in multiple formats  including  epub format  These  documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax  Whether you re a  student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom  sharing scanned pictures from last year   s birthday party  Samsung Easy  Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools     The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below   Image Sc
186. meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications    Le  present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables  d Industrie Canada     The Ringer Equivalence Number  REN  is an indication of the maximum number  of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface  The termination of  an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five    L indice  d equivalence de la sonnerie  IES  sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de  terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique  La  terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de  dispositifs  a la seule condition que la somme d indices d equivalence de la  sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n   excede pas cinq     Fax Branding    The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a  telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin  at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  transmission the following information     1 the date and time of transmission    2 identification of either business  business entity or individual sending the  message  and    3 telephone number of either the sending machine  business  business entity  or individual     The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facili
187. ment method is DHCP  check if DHCP is shown in  the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window  If it shows Static  click  Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  address automatically  DHCP       For the Static method  If the IP address assignment method is Static  check if Static is shown in  the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window  If it shows DHCP  click  Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  values for the machine   For example   If the computer   s network information is shown as follows     IP address  169 254 133 42    Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0  Then  the machine   s network information should be as shown below     IP address  169 254 133 43    13    14  15    K      Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0  Use the computer s subnet mask      Gateway  169 254 133 1    When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is  confirmed appears  disconnect the network cable and click Next     If the network cable is connected  it may have trouble finding the  machine when configuring the wireless network     The wireless network connects according to the network configuration   Wireless network set up is completed  After installation is finished  click    Quit     After completing the wireless network connection  you need to install a  machine driver to print from an application  see  Installation for Mac  on  page 142      2  Using a Network Connected Machine 182    Wireless network setup    Using a network cable    Mac
188. month  assuming 20 working days  a printer limits 2 400 pages a day     Glossary 330    Glossary    ECM    EtherTalk          Error Correction Mode  ECM  is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1  fax machines or fax modems  It automatically detects and corrects errors in the  fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise     Emulation    A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking  It  was included in the original Mac  1984  and is now deprecated by Apple in favor  of TCP IP networking     FDI          Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another     An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system  so  that the second system behaves like the first system  Emulation focuses on exact  reproduction of external behavior  which is in contrast to simulation  which  concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated  often considering its  internal state     Ethernet       Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area  networks  LANs   It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer  and frame  formats and protocols for the media access control  MAC  data link layer of the  OSI model  Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3  It has become the most  widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present     Foreign Device Interface  FDI  is a card installed inside the machine to allowa  third party devi
189. multiple pages on one sheet       You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper  This feature  provides a cost effective way to print draft copies     1 Open an application  and select Print from the File menu    2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation  In the Pages  per Sheet drop down list  select the number of pages you want to print  on one sheet of paper     3 Select the other options to use     4 Click Print     The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet  of paper     4  Special Features    Printing features                   Printing on both sides of the paper Using help  Click the question mark on the bottom left corner of the window and click on  Some features may not be available depending on models or options  It the topic you want to know about  A pop up window appears with information  means that the features are not supported  see  Variety feature  on page about that option s feature  which is provided from the driver   10    Printer    10 88 181 197 EZIZ   Presets    Standard Z   Before printing in the duplex mode  decide on which edge you will be binding a  BG aa  your finished document  The binding options are  as follows  roe sire  Ga a is  Orientation  iB las  Long Edge Binding  This option is the conventional layout used in book E a  binding  Pages per Sheet  G17      A   2  S A N  Short Edge Binding  This option is the type often used with calendars  i as wa E     Two Sided    Off Z     Reverse Pa
190. n 2 9 W           Network Standby Mode  All e C46xW  Less than 2 48 W  Port Activation     C46xFW  Less than 2 55 W             Wireless    Module SPW B4319S            Sound Pressure Level  ISO 7779  Configuration tested  basic machine installation  A4 paper  simplex printing     China only  If the equipment s noise is louder than 63 db  A   the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice   See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage  V   frequency  hertz  and of current  A  for your machine     The power consumption may be affected by the machine s status  setting conditions  operating environment  and measuring equipment and method the country uses     Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected   Wireless models only  see  Features by model  on page 7       at     Amana    5  Appendix KO    Specifications    Print media specifications                                     Print media weight Capacity            Type Size Dimensions  Tray  Legal 216 x 356 mm  8 5 x 14 inches    150 sheets of 75 g m   20 Ibs bond   US Folio 216 x 330 mm  8 5 x 13 inches   A4 210 x 297 mm  8 27 x 11 69 inches   Oficio 216 x 343 mm  8 5 x 13 5 inches   Plain paper  JIS B5 182 x 257 mm  7 17 x 10 12 inches   ISO B5 176x250 mm  6 93 x 9 84 inches   Executive 184 x 267 mm  7 25 x 10 5 inches   A5 148 x 210 mm  5 83 x 8 27 inches   A6 105 x 148 mm  4 13 x 5 83 inches   Thick Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain pap
191. n and  www remanufacturing org uk  Each model has a different index     The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing  power consumption of this machine     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup     Basic copying    For special printing features  refer to the Advanced Guide  see  Copy  on  page 206            7 Ifyou need to cancel the copying job during the operation  press   amp  stop           Clear  and the copying will stop     ap   ani a    1 C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button s LED is off             Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and             C46xFW  Select O  copy  on the control panel  easily make a copy   2 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the e  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on y    Ifyou press the     Stop Clear  button twice while setting the copy  page 48   options  all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be  canceled and returned to their default status  Or  they will automatically  3 If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce Enlarge  return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in  Darkness  Contrast  Original Type  and more by using the control progress   panel buttons  see  Changing the settings for each copy  on page 58   e Accessing menus may differ from model to model  see  Accessing the  menu  on page 31    4 Enter the number of copies using the arrow 
192. n options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31               To change the menu options     In scan mode  press 13  Menu   gt  Scan Setup on the control panel          C46xW   When the Scan to button s LED is on  the machine is in scan  4 mode              e C46xFW  Press D iscan  on the control panel     Item Description    Resets the value or setting to the printer   s out of box  Change Default g P          state   Change Default  gt  Resets the USB scan setting to the printer s out of box  USB Default state     3  Useful Setting Menus 214      System setup          Description    Sets how long the machine waits before going to power  save mode     When the machine does not receive data for an extended  period of time  power consumption is automatically  lowered        Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or Power Save  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31     Auto Power Off    To change the menu options       Press EF   Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Machine Setup on the control panel     Item Description    Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of    Machine ID  See each fax page that you send        Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of             Fax Number  each fax page that you send   Date  amp  Time Sets the date and time   Clock Mode Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr  and  24 hr   Language S
193. naging USB memory    You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at  once by reformatting the device        If you see     or  D  in the front of a folder name  there are one or more files  or folders in the selected folder     A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device  files cannot be    restored  Therefore  confirm that you no longer need the data before  deleting it     Deleting an image file       uu Bm W N    Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine   and then press Direct USB     Select File Manage  gt  Delete and press OK   Select the file you want to delete and press OK   Select Yes     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    Using USB memory device    Formatting a USB memory device       1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine   and then press Direct USB     2 Select File Manage  gt  Format and press OK   3 Select Yes     4 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Viewing the USB memory status       You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving  documents     1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine   and then press Direct USB     2 Select Check Space   3 The available memory space appears on the display     4 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup    3  Maintenance    This chapter provides information about purchasing
194. nd add it to your printer  list   If your machine supports fax  click Add Fax button to select your fax and    add it to your fax list    After the installation is finished  click Close   To install the fax driver   a Open the Applications folder  gt  Samsung  gt  Fax Queue Creator     b Your machine appears on the Printer List  c Select machine to use and click Create button    1  Software Installation 142     Reinstallation for Mac    If the printer driver does not work properly  uninstall the driver and reinstall it      a uk W N       Open the Applications folder  gt  Samsung  gt  Printer Software  Uninstaller     To uninstall printer software  click Continue   Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall   Enter the password and click OK     After the uninstallation is finished  click Close     If a machine has already been added  delete it from the Print Setup Utility  or Print  amp  Fax     1  Software Installation 143    Installation for Linux    You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  install the printer software  http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt   Support or Downloads      Installing the Unified Linux Driver       1       N Aa UW Kk    Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     When the Administrator Login window appears  type    root    in the    Login field and enter the system password     You must log in as a super user  root  to install the machine software  If you 
195. nd repeat  steps 5 and 6     You can add up to 10 destinations     Once you have entered a group dial number  you cannot enter another  group dial number     When you have finished entering fax numbers  select No at the Another  No   prompt and press OK     The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  order in which you entered them     Multi send report is printed after sending faxes     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 66    Basic faxing    Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory  When you receive a fax  the  machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically  receives the fax     Adjusting the document settings    Before starting a fax  change the following settings according to your original   s  status to get the best quality     It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some  models        Resolution       The default document settings produce good results when using typical text   based originals  However  if you send originals that are of poor quality  or  contain photographs  you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality  fax              Select ae  fax   gt  KE  Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Resolution on the control  panel     Select the option you want and press OK     Standard  Originals with normal sized characters     Fine  Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals  printed using a dot matrix printer     Super Fine  Originals containing extremely f
196. nds and tools  to edit your scanned image        9 Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview  Pane     10 Select the option you want     11 Scan and save your scanned image     2 For later use  you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type  drop down list        4  Special Features  249    Fax features    KA e For basic faxing features  refer to the Basic Guide  see  Basic faxing  on  page 64         e This function is not supported for C46xW  see  Control panel overview   on page 23      Automatic redialing    When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send  a fax  the machine automatically redials the number  The redial time depends on  the country s factory default setting     When the display shows Retry Redial   press p  Start  button to redial the    number without waiting  To cancel the automatic redialing  press  Cancel    or Stop Clear      To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts     Press PG  fax   gt  f    Menu  Fax Setup  gt  Sending on the control  panel     2 Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want     3 Select the option you want     Redialing the fax number    1 Press     Redial Pause  button on the control panel     2 Select the fax number you want   Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown   3 When an original is loaded in the document feeder  the machine  automatically begins to send     If an original is placed on the 
197. nection  Or check the  printer driver for WSD is correctly installed              4 Select your computer name from WSD PC List   5 Select the option you want and press OK     6 Scanning begins     4  Special Features 244    Scan features    Scanning from image editing program    You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as  Adobe Photoshop  if the software is TWAIN compliant  Follow the steps below  to scan with TWAIN compliant software     a uu fb W    Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48     Open an application  such as Adobe Photoshop    Click File  gt  Import  and select the scanner device     Set the scan options     Scan and save your scanned image     Scanning using the WIA driver       Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition  WIA  driver for  scanning images  WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft  Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners  Unlike the TWAIN  driver  the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using  additional software     KU The WIA driver works only on Windows OS  not supported Windows 2000   with a USB port              1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     2 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  
198. nection Type screen     5 Follow the instructions in the installation window     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 306     Installing the driver over the wireless network    L        Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen  when V4 driver is installed  The V4 driver is automatically downloaded  from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet   If not  you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website   www samsung com    find your product  gt  Support or downloads     If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  V4 driver is not  installed  If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen  you can  download from the Samsung website  www samsung com    find your  product 5 Support or downloads     You must set up for wireless network using the supplied software CD in  Desktop screen mode     If you are using a computer without a CD ROM  you can set up the  wireless network from the machine s control panel  see  Wireless  network setup  on page 159      From the Start Screen    After completing the wireless network connection  you need to install a  machine driver to print from an application     From Charms  select Settings 5 Change PC settings 5 Devices     Click Add a device     Discovered machines will be shown on the screen     Click the model name or host name you wish to use     KA You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control  panel that will show the current machine s
199. ner cartridge  has reached its estimated  cartridge life   The machine  might stop printing        Replace the toner  cartridge  see  Replacing  the toner cartridge  on  page 81      4  Troubleshooting 108    J Understanding display messages    a  Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life  which indicates  the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798  see  Available  supplies  on page 76   The number of pages may be affected by operating environment   percentage of image area  printing interval  media  percentage of image area  and media size   Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears  and the machine stops printing     Samsung does not recommend using a non genuine Samsung toner  cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured  Samsung cannot guarantee a  non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality  Service or repair required  as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be  covered under the machine warranty     4  Troubleshooting 109    Understanding display messages    Tray related messages    Message    Jam or empty    Door open amp close       Meaning    Paper has jammed in the  paper feed area     There is no paper in tray     Network related messages       Message    Network Problem     Meaning    The network IP address you  have set is being used by       Suggested solutions  Clear the jam  see  In  tray  on page 101      Load paper
200. ner might not adhere properly to this type of paper     printed lighter than therestof    Change the printer option and try again  Go to Printing Preferences  click the Paper tab  and set the paper type to Recycled  see    the paper  Opening printing preferences  on page 54         AaBbCc   AaBbCc   AaBbCc  AaBbCc             6  Troubleshooting 283    Printing quality problems    Condition    Toner specks             Suggested solutions    The paper may not meet specifications  for example  the paper may be too moist or rough       The transfer roller may be dirty  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89                  A   iC Cc The paper path may need cleaning  Contact a service representative  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89    A amp iC c    A amp C c  A BICS  A i   c  Dropouts If faded areas  generally rounded  occur randomly on the page   A single sheet of paper may be defective  Try reprinting the job   A A 3   S The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface  Try a different brand of paper   AaBbG e The paper lot is bad  The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner  Try a different kind or brand of paper   AaBbO Change the printer option and try again  Go to Printing Preferences  click the Paper tab  and set type to Thick  see  Opening  AaBbo printing preferences  on page 54      If these steps do not correct the problem  contact a service representative        White Spo
201. network setup  chapter  see  Wireless network setup  on page 159         Quick Guide for Windows 8 User gg    J Uninstalling the driver       From the Start Screen    1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     2 Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start  screen     3 Follow the instructions in the window     KA e Ifyou cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile  unintstall from the  desktop screen mode  see  From the Desktop Screen  on page 309         e Ifyou want to uninstall Samsung s printer management tools  from the  Start screen  right click the app 5 Uninstall 5 right click the program  you want to delete 5 Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window     From the Desktop Screen    U Bb WN      From Charms  select Search 5 Apps    Search and click Control Panel    Click Programs and Features    Right click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall     Follow the instructions in the window     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 309    Using Samsung Printer Experience    Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines   Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location  You 2 The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using   can set device settings  order supplies  open troubleshooting guides  visit   Samsung s web site  and check connected machine information  This   application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the Samsun
202. ng com  08008 726 78 64  08008 www samsung com   93 33   pl support ROMANIA SAMSUNG   ro support  1677 6784 Apel GRATUIT  POLAND  HHP  0 a 672 678    lub  48 22  607 93 33 RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung com      koszt potaczenia wedtug taryfy ru support  operatora   920021230 www samsung com       sa support  PORTUGAL 808 20 7267 www samsung com  upp  pt support SAUDI ARABIA www samsung com   sa_en support   English    SENEGAL 800 00 0077 www samsung com           africa_fr support    Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 1325    i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Country Region    Customer Care Center    011 321 6899    WebSite    www samsung com        Country Region    Customer Care Center    WebSite                                                 SERBIA  rs support  SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com   sg support  080 697 267 www samsung com   SLOVENIA BYE  090 726 786 apo  SLOVAKIA 0800   SAMSUNG 0800 726 786   www samsung com   sk support  SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG  726 7864  www samsung com   support  0034902172678 www samsung com   SPAIN   it   HHP  0034902167267    s 3UPPO  0094117540540 www samsung com   SRI LANKA it  0094115900000 SUppo  SUDAN 1969 www samsung com   support  SWEDEN 0771 726 7864  SAMSUNG  www samsung com   se support  0800 726 78 64  0800 SAMSUNG  www samsung com   ch support  German   SWITZERLAND             www samsung com     ch_fr support  French           18252273 www samsung com   SYRIA levant support   English   TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 5
203. ng job           Sets the emulation type and option     3  Useful Setting Menus 205    Copy                                                                                        Item Description  Copy feature  Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  Darkness easier to read  when the original contains faint          markings and dark images  see  Darkness  on page 59   Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on Oriainal Type Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  page 31   g YP type for the current copy job  see  Original  on page 59   Payal Ain ki a format such as poster  clone  ID copy   To change the menu options   Hp  POGRIEL ENG  8 Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4  In copy mode  press 23   Menu   gt  Copy Feature on the control panel  pages onto one sheet of paper     1          C46xW  When the Scan to button s LED is off  the machine is in copy IL T  4 mode  N Ga  Layout  ZUR SS on  S            C46xFW  Press  copy  on the control panel  Layout  gt  4 up   ae    it   ar WU This copy feature is available only when you  en Seco  load originals into the document feeder   Original Size Sets the image size   Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image  see prints one side of the original on the upper half of the   Reduced or enlarged copy  on page 60   Layout  gt  ID Copy pape aaa eens side on me et half MIUNGUE  reducing t
204. nication Standards Institute  ETSI  has issued an advisory document   EG 201 121  which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure  network compatibility of TBR21 terminals  The product has been designed  against  and is fully compliant with  all of the relevant advisory notes contained  in this document     5  Appendix 133    Regulatory information    European radio approval information  for products  fitted with EU approved radio devices        Low power  Radio LAN type devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless  communication devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band  may be present   embedded  in your printer system which is intended for home or office use  This  section is only applicable if these devices are present  Refer to the system label  to verify the presence of wireless devices     Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for  use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark is on the  system label     CE    The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European  Commission through the R amp TTE directive     European states qualified under wireless approvals     EU countries    European states with restrictions on use   EU  EEA EFTA countries    No limitations at this time    Israel only    5129003 NIN NNUPNN TIWN IV NDININ NWN    09     PWINA IV WNPAN AIVINA NN PINNI NON  INN 720 NOW 92 12 NWYT NI       Regulatory compliance st
205. nners    options   dev mfp1 relates to LP 1  and so on  USB ports start at    dev mfp4  so scanner on USB 0 relates to  dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially  In the Selected port pane  you can see if  the port is occupied by another application  If this is the case  you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the  Release port button  if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly        The machine does not scan          Ensure a document is loaded into the machine  ensure your machine is connected to the computer       If there is an I O error while scanning     6  Troubleshooting 298     Operating system problems       2 Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages     Common PostScript problems    The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used           Problem    The PostScript file cannot be  printed    Possible cause    The PostScript driver may not be installed  correctly     Solution    e Install the PostScript driver  see  Software Installation  on page 141        Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for  printing       Ifthe problem persists  contact a service representative        Limit Check Error report prints    The print job was too complex     You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory        A PostScript error p
206. nstalled  Waste tank       The waste toner container is  not installed        Install a Samsung   genuine waste toner  container     4  Troubleshooting aa    J Understanding display messages    Message    Check Fax Line    Meaning    The fax line is not properly  connected to the LINE port     Suggested solutions    Connect the fax line to  the LINE port not to the  EXT port  see  Rear view   on page 22      Message    Prepare new    Transfer roller    Meaning    The life of the transfer belt  will expired soon     Suggested solutions    Replace the transfer belt  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives        Not proper room    temp  Move set    The machine is in a room  with improper room  temperature     Move the machine to a  room with proper room  temperature           Output bin Full    Remove paper    The output tray is full  Or the  sensor is not facing down     Remove papers from the  output tray  the machine  resumes printing  Or  make sure the sensor is  facing down  If the  problem persists  call for  service     Replace new    Transfer roller    The life of the transfer belt  has expired     Replace the transfer belt  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives        Replace    Fuser Soon    The life of the fuser unit will  be expired soon        Replace new    Fuser unit    The life of the fuser unit will  be expired     Replace the fuser unit  with a new one  Contact  the service  representatives           Prepare new    Transfer belt  
207. nt wireless environment  please ask the person who set up your network   Network connected computer To configure wireless parameters  you can use SyncThru   Web Service     Software CD that was provided with your machine  A machine installed with a wireless network interface    Network cable    2  Using a Network Connected Machine 183    Wireless network setup    Using SyncThru    Web Service       KA Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration  However  if    Before starting wireless parameter configuration  check the cable connection you want to set the wireless network directly  select Custom     status        N kN ID  in the list   1 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine  If 7 Jc mc Che NetWare Names SID nine ye     not  connect the machine with a standard network cable    SSID  SSID  Service Set Identifier  is a name that identifies a wireless  network  access points  and wireless devices attempting to connect  2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer  Safari  or Firefox and enter to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID  The SSID is  your machine s new IP address in the browser window  case sensitive   For example  e Operation Mode  Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless    connections  see  Wireless network name and network password         http   192  168  1  133  on page 159      3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru    Web Service website    Ad hoc  Allows wireless devices to commun
208. ntaining mostly text     Text Photo  Use for originals with mixed text and photographs     If texts in the printout is blurry  select Text to get the clear texts     Photo  Use when the originals are photographs     Magazine  Use when the originals are magazine     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup B    Basic copying    Reduced or enlarged copy       You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25  to 400  from the  document feeder or scanner glass     4    This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Variety feature  on page 10      If the machine set to Eco mode  reduce and enlarge features are not  available     To select from the predefined copy sizes    1    C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button   s LED is off     C46xFW  Select SH  copy  on the control panel     Select KE  Menu  5 Copy Feature 5 Reduce Enlarge on the control  panel     Select the option you want and press OK     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate    1    N    ij  mu aw    C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button   s LED is off     C46xFW  Select SH  copy  on the control panel     Select NE  Menu   gt  Copy Feature  gt  Reduce Enlarge  gt  Custom on the  control panel     Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad   Press OK to save the selection     Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     When you make a reduced copy  black lin
209. ntrol  press it        The machine is not selected as the default Select your machine as your default machine in Windows     machine           Check the machine for the following     The cover is not closed  Close the cover    Paper is jammed  Clear the paper jam  see  Clearing paper jams  on page 101     No paper is loaded  Load paper  see  Loading paper in the tray  on page 40     The toner cartridge is not installed  Install the toner cartridge  see  Replacing the toner cartridge  on page 81      Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge  see  Replacing the toner cartridge  on page 81      If a system error occurs  contact your service representative        The connection cable between the computer and   Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it  see  Rear view  on page 22      the machine is not connected properly        The connection cable between the computer and _ If possible  attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job   the machine is defective  You can also try using a different machine cable           The port setting is incorrect  Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct    port  If the computer has more than one port  make sure that the machine is attached to  the correct one        6  Troubleshooting    Printing problems    Condition    The machine does not  print     Possible cause    The machine may be configured incorrectly     Suggested s
210. o open an animation about clearing a jam     e The fuser area is hot  Take care when removing paper from the machine        e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20         4  Troubleshooting ga    Clearing paper jams    In exit area    x  oe       gt   Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam     e The fuser area is hot  Take care when removing paper from the machine        e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20         4  Troubleshooting 104    Understanding the status LED    The color of the LED indicates the machine s current status     9 e Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country  see  Control panel overview  on page 23         e To resolve the error  look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part  see  Understanding display messages  on page 107    e You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer s Samsung Printing Status window  see  Using Samsung Printer Status  on page 271      e Ifthe problem persists  call a service representative                          LED Status Description  Off The machine is off line   Blinking When the backlight blinks  the machine is receiving or printing data   Green  On e The machine is on line and can be used     A minor erro
211. ocument into a JPG  PDF  or PNG format for    iOS 4 0 or higher  iPod Touch  iPhone  iPad    quick and easy viewing on your mobile device     Downloading Samsung Mobile Print    To download Samsung Mobile Print  go to the application store  Samsung  Apps  Play Store  App Store  on your mobile device  and just search for     Samsung Mobile Print     You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your  computer        Android    2  Using a Network Connected Machine 192    Using the NFC feature    The NFC Near Field Communication  printer allows you to directly print scan  from your cell phone just by holding your cell phone over the NFC tag on your  printer  It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an access  point  You just need NFC supported cell phone  In order to use this feature   Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your cell phone        i   Depending on the material of the cell phone cover  NFC recognition may  4 not work properly              e Depending on the cell phone you are using  the tranmission speed may  differ     NFC and Wi Fi Direct enabled  Mobile Print app installed cell phone with  Android OS 4 0 or higher     WA Only Android OS 4 1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi Fi Direct  feature on your cell phone when you enable the NFC feature  We    recommend you to upgrade your cell phone to Android OS 4 1 or higher to  use the NFC feature              Wi Fi Direct feature enabled printer  Wi Fi Direct feature is enable
212. of binary  images  particularly for faxes  but can also be used on other images     JPEG       Joint Photographic Experts Group  JPEG  is a most commonly used standard  method of lossy compression for photographic images  It is the format used for  storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web     Glossary 333    Glossary    LDAP    MH          The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol  LDAP  is a networking protocol for  querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP     LED       A Light Emitting Diode  LED  is a semiconductor device that indicates the status  of a machine     MAC address       Media Access Control  MAC  address is a unique identifier associated with a  network adapter  MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12  hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs  e  g   00 00 0c 34 11 4e   This address  is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card  NIC  by its manufacturer   and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks     MFP       Multi Function Peripheral  MFP  is an office machine that includes the following  functionality in one physical body  so as to have a printer  a copier  a fax  a  scanner and etc     Modified Huffman  MH  is a compression method for decreasing the amount of  data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the  image recommended by ITU T T 4  MH is a codebook based run length  encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white 
213. of the paper  Remove the paper and turn it around     The paper may not meet paper specifications   Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear     e The imaging unit may be installed improperly  Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it   e The imaging unit may be defective  Remove the imaging unit and install a new one  see  Replacing the imaging unit  on page 85      If the problem persists  the machine may require repairing  Contact a service representative              6  Troubleshooting 289    Printing quality problems    Condition Suggested solutions    Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine       Turn the stack of paper over in the tray  Also try rotating the paper 180   in the tray             AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  CA BC  An unknown image Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m  3 281 ft  or above     repetitively appears on a few  sheets    e Change the printer s paper option and try again  Go to Printing Preferences  click the Paper tab  and set type to Thin  see   Opening printing preferences  on page 54            The high altitude may affect the print quality  such as loose toner or light imaging  Change the altitude setting for your machine  see     Altitude adjustment  on page 224    Loose toner    Light print or contamination  occurs       6  Troubleshooting 290     Copying problems    Condition Suggested solutions    Copies are too light or too dark  Adjust the darkness 
214. ok at the list of available machines  Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list  If not  open  Add new printer wizard to set up your device     The machine does not print     e Check ifthe machine is started  Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list  Look at the description  in the Selected printer pane  If its status contains Stopped  press the Start button  Normal operation of the machine should be  restored  The    stopped    status might be activated when some problems in printing occur     e Check if your application has special print options such as     oraw   If     oraw    is specified in the command line parameter  then  remove it to print properly  For Gimp front end  select    print      gt     Setup printer    and edit the command line parameter in the  command item        Some color images comeoutall This is a known bug in Ghostscript  until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05  when the base color space of the document is indexed color  black  space and it is converted through CIE color space  Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System  you should  upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later  You can find recent Ghostscript versions at  www ghostscript com        Some color images come outin This is a known bug in Ghostscript  until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx  when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color  unexpected color  space and it is conv
215. olutions    Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct        The printer driver may be incorrectly installed     Uninstall and reinstall the machine   s driver        The machine is malfunctioning     Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a  system error  Contact a service representative        The document size is so big that the hard disk  space of the computer is insufficient to access the  print job     Get more hard disk space and print the document again        The output tray is full     Once the paper is removed from the output tray  the machine resumes printing        The machine selects print  materials from the wrong  paper source     The paper option that was selected in the  Printing Preferences may be incorrect     For many software applications  the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab  within the Printing Preferences  see  Opening printing preferences  on page 54    Select the correct paper source  See the printer driver help screen  see  Using help  on  page 55         A print job is extremely  slow     The job may be very complex     Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings        Half the page is blank     The page orientation setting may be incorrect     Change the page orientation in your application  see  Opening printing preferences  on  page 54   See the printer driver help screen  see  Using help  on page 55       
216. om  In this mode  users can give or edit manually their own  SSID  or choose the security option in detail     Setup using Windows    9 Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD  If  you have installed the printer driver once  you can access the Samsung  Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD  see  Accessing  management tools  on page 317         Access point via USB cable       Items to prepare  Access point  Network connected computer  Software CD that was provided with your machine  A machine installed with a wireless network interface    USB cable    Creating the infrastructure network  1 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine     2 Turn on your computer  access point  and machine     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 166    Wireless network setup       3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive           If the installation window does not appear  click Start  gt  All programs  gt     Accessories  gt  Run     X  Setup exe replacing    X    with the letter  which represents your CD     ROM drive and click OK     4 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type  screen  Then  click Next     1  Welcome    2  Connecting Printers Printer Connection Type    3  Select Software Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network     4  Installation    5  Finish    Connect the printer to 
217. omize  you can choose individual components to install     Enter the password and click OK     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 180    Wireless network setup    1 0 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection 11 After searching the wireless networks  a list of wireless networks your  Type and click Continue  machine has searched appears  Click Advanced Setting   YOC Printer Connection Type       e    Enter the wireless Network Name  Enter the SSID name  SSID is case     Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network              sensitive         O USB Connected Printer     g Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable  s Operation Mode  Select ad hoc    a   Network Conneted Printer  Wired or Wireless  e Channel  Select the channel  Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz     r Connect the printer to the same network as this computer  5 M i         If you want to change IP address of your device  click  Set IP Address    e Authentication  Select an authentication type    Button  A      naa DA Open System  Authentication is not used  and encryption may or may              Configuration of Wireless network not be used  depending on the need for data security    O    This is for users who have not set up the wireless connection before   The installer will help you set up the wireless network     Shared Key  Authentication is used  A device that has a proper WEP key  can access the network    Select if you want to install t
218. ommunications between nodes on a  network  It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication  mechanism     SMTP       Simple Mail Transfer Protocol  SMTP  is the standard for e mail transmissions  across the Internet  SMTP is a relatively simple  text based protocol  where one  or more recipients of a message are specified  and then the message text is  transferred  It is a client server protocol  where the client transmits an email  message to the server     SSID       Service Set Identifier  SSID  is a name of a wireless local area network  WLAN   All  wireless devices ina WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with  each other  The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32  characters     Subnet Mask       The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine  which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host  address        The Transmission Control Protocol  TCP  and the Internet Protocol  IP   the set of  communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the  Internet and most commercial networks run     TCR       Transmission Confirmation Report  TCR  provides details of each transmission  such as job status  transmission result and number of pages sent  This report can  be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions     TIFF       Tagged Image File Format  TIFF  is a variable resolution bitmapped image  format  TIFF describes image data that typical
219. on the  options or models     error number  indicates the error number     tray type  indicates the tray number            media type  indicates the media type    media size  indicates the media size         color  indicates the color of toner     Paper Jam related messages    Message    Document jam     Remove jam    Meaning    The loaded original  document has jammed in  the document feeder     Suggested solutions    Clear the jam  see  Clearing  original document jams  on  page 96         Jam or empty    Door open amp close    e Paper has jammed in the  paper feed area     e There is no paper in tray     Clear the jam  see  In  tray  on page 101      Load paper in tray  see   Loading paper in the  tray  on page 40         Paper Jam    inside machine    Paper has jammed inside the  machine     Clear the jam  see  Inside  the machine  on page 103         Paper Jam in  tray  type     Paper has jammed in the  paper tray     Clear the jam  see  Clearing  paper jams  on page 101         Paper Jam    in exit area    Paper has jammedin the exit  area     Clear the jam  see  In exit  area  on page 104         Paper Empty in   tray type        There is no paper in tray        Load paper in tray  see   Loading paper in the tray   on page 40      4  Troubleshooting    j Understanding display messages    Toner related messages    Message      Install Toner      Install toner  cartridge    Meaning    A toner cartridge is not  installed     Suggested solutions    Install a toner cartridg
220. on window     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 304    j Installing the driver over the network    L        e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7      e Machine that do not support networking will not be able to use this  feature  see  Rear view  on page 22      e Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen  when V4 driver is installed  The V4 driver is automatically downloaded  from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet   If not  you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website   www samsung com    find your product  gt  Support or downloads       If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  V4 driver is not  installed  If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen  you can  download from the Samsung website  www samsung com  gt find your  product  gt  Support or downloads        From the Start Screen    1    Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  on  Also  your machine s IP address should have been set  see  Setting IP  address  on page 148      From Charms  select Settings 5 Change PC settings 5 Devices     Click Add a device     Discovered machines will be shown on the screen     Click the model name or host name you wish to use     KA         You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine   s  control panel that will show the current machine   s host name  see   Pr
221. onfiguring the wireless settings for the printer  your Internet may be   disconnected  g   You have to press WPS button on your printer within two minutes     Using a USB cable  Configure wireless settings to the printer through a USB connection     lt  Back Next  gt  Cancel       12 When the wireless network set up is completed  click Next      lt  Back   Next  gt    Cancel       1 3 After the installation is finished  click Close     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    Ad hoc via USB cable       If you do not have an access point  AP   you may still connect the machine  wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by  following these simple directions     Items to prepare  Network connected computer  Software CD that was provided with your machine  A machine installed with a wireless network interface    USB cable    Creating the ad hoc network in Mac    1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and    powered on     2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive        O N QAU A    Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop   For Mac OS X 10 8  double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder     Double click the MAC_Installer folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   Click Continue    Read the license agreement and click Continue    Click Agree to agree to the license agreement     Click Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  installed     If you click Cust
222. or number keypad  if   It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for  necessary  some models     5 Press Start      2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI    Basic copying    Darkness       If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images  you can adjust  the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read     1 C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button s LED is off   C46xFW  Select  copy  on the control panel   2 Select T3  Menu   gt  Copy Feature  gt  Darkness on the control panel     3 Select the option you want and press OK     For example  the Light 5 being the lightest  and the Dark 5 being the  darkest     4 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Darkness       The Darkness menu lets you increase or decrease the difference between the  bright and dark areas of an image     1 C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button   s LED is off     C46xFW  Select  copy  on the control panel   QF    2 Select KE  Menu  5 Copy Feature 5 Darkness on the control panel     3    Select the option you want and press OK     4 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Original       The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  document for the current copy job     1    C46xW  Make sure that the Scan to button s LED is off   C46xFW  Select SH  copy  on the control panel   Select KE  Menu   gt  Copy Feature  gt  Original Type on the control panel     Select the option you want and press OK   Text  Use for originals co
223. oring documents  presentations  downloaded music and  videos  high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or  move     You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device   Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device  Print data stored on a USB memory device  Restore backup files to the machine   s memory    Format the USB memory device       Check the available memory space    The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and  USB V2 0 memory devices  Your machine supports USB memory devices with  FAT16 FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes     Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 6o    Using USB memory device    You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector      bi Q Scanning to a USB memory device  OD i        W H  MW Accessing menus may differ from model to model  see  Accessing the  a     menu  on page 31       ee    e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for  some models     a       Use only a metal shielded USB memory device     You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory  device        Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification     otherwise  the machine might not recognize it     Scanning       A e Donotremove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation  or writing to or reading from USB memory  The m
224. ot be available depending on the model or country     Description  amp  Reference    Windows user  see  Access point via USB cable  on page 166        Windows user  see  Access point without a USB cable  recommended   on page 170        e Mac user  see  Access point via USB cable  on page 175     e Mac user  see  Access point without a USB cable  recommended   on page 178       See  Using a network cable  on page 183           From the machine   s control  panel    2    N       e See  Machines with a display screen  on page 163     e See  Machines without a display screen  on page 164           See  Using the menu button  on page 166     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 160    Wireless network setup    Set up method    Without Access Point    Co             Connecting method  From the computer    Ad hoc       Description  amp  Reference    Windows user  see  Ad hoc via USB cable  on page 172        Mac user  see  Ad hoc via USB cable  on page 172           Wi Fi Direct setup    Wi Fi Direct      7       See  Setting up Wi Fi Direct  on page 186     KU e If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation  refer to the troubleshooting chapter  see  Troubleshooting  on page 188      e Itis strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points  If you do not set the password on Access Points  they might be exposed to illegal access  from unknown machines including PCs  smart phones and printers  Refer to the Access Point user s guide for password settin
225. ower for the access point  or wireless router   machine  and    communication  communication types  e g   Bluetooth  are not supported         Check whether firewall software  V3 or Norton  is blocking the e When using the ad hoc mode  in operating systems such as Windows Vista   communication  you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use    the wireless machine   If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it    cannot be found when searching  firewall software might be blocking the e You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for  communication  Refer to the user s guide for the software to turn it off and Samsung wireless network machines     try searching for the machine again  ee Las    y g g e The machine is within the range of the wireless network        Check whether the machine s IP address is allocated correctly  You can  check the IP address by printing the network configuration report     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 190    Wireless network setup    e The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless  signal     Remove any large metal objects between the access point  or wireless  router  and the machine     Make sure the machine and wireless access point  or wireless router  are not  separated by poles  walls  or support columns containing metal or concrete     e The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may  interfere with the wirele
226. pe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water  Hot water sets toner into fabric   e When opening a scan unit  hold the document feeder and scan unit together     e Printing even after the toner empty status can cause serious damage to your machine     3  Maintenance             j Redistributing toner                      3  Maintenance    Replacing the toner cartridge    s  gs        Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge     2 e Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly  it will increase the initial print quality     e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see  Front view  on page 20      A e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package  They might scratch the drum of the cartridge     If toner gets on your clothing  wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water  Hot water sets toner into fabric   e When opening a scan unit  hold the document feeder and scan unit together     e Printing even after the toner empty status can cause serious damage to your machine     3  Maintenance CI      Replacing the toner cartridge    When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life  the Printing Status window appears on the computer  indicating the toner cartridge needs to be placed                       3  Maintenance    Replacing the waste toner container    When the life span of the waste toner contain
227. pecial features    243  245    70   320   148  183  223    Index ga    Index             specifications 115 troubleshooting 319 using SetIP 148  183  print media 117 Windows 8  status 24  26 s driver uninstallation 309  supplies understanding the status LED 105 network  available supplies 76 Unix driver installation 305  estimated toner cartridge life 78 system requirements 122 USB cable  monitoring the supplies life 87 USB cable driver installation 303  ordering 76 driver installation 28  29  142  144  143  145 wireless  replacing toner cartridge 81 USB flash memory driver installation 307  SyncThru Web Service managing 72 wireless  general information 264 printing 71 ad hoc mode 159  SyncThru    Web Service 264 scanning 70 Infrastructure mode 159  using help 55  238 USB cable 166  170  T WPS  toner cartridge W disconnectiong 163  estimated life 78 watermark PBC mode 163  handling instructions 78 create 234 pl 164  non Samsung and refilled 78 delete 234 wireless network  redistributing toner 79  81 edit 234 network cable 183  storing 78 Windows  tray common Windows problems 295  adjusting the width and length 39 driver installation for network connected  changing the tray size 39 151  28  29  305  303  307    setting the paper size and type 46 system requirements 120       
228. preferences             ThePrinting Preferences window that appears in this user s guide may  y differ depending on the machine in use              e When you select an option in Printing Preferences  you may see a  warning mark  amp  or a   An 4  mark means you can select that certain    option but it is not recommended  and an  amp  mark means you cannot  select that option due to the machine   s setting or environment     Open the document you want to print   1  2 Select Print from the file menu  The Print window appears     3 Select your machine from the Select Printer     4 Click Properties or Preferences        tmx Printing Preferences    Favortes  Basic    Paper   Graphics   Advanced   Eco    Samsung        Preview  4  Details               sides    2 in 1 Printing    one side of a sheet    This favorite enables you to save paper by printing 2 pages on    Y   Last Used Settin    2 A4   mm  This favorite enables you to print with last used settings 210x 297mm   inch  z Normal Printing       e  This favorite enables you to print with all factory default  setings  Pa   Eco Preview Printin i  BA co e g  This favorite enables you to see a print preview and save ton  A Currently connected printer doesn t support this feature  Dp  Double Sided Printing  4 This favorite enables you to save paper by printing on double     re                       Easy Eco Driver  on page 263       re  Esje Booklet Printing  This favorite enables you to lay out a document as a booklet  format  P
229. py job  For example  if you  make 2 copies of a 3 page original  one complete 3 page  document will print followed by a second complete  document     e On  Prints output in sets to match the sequence of  originals        e Off  Prints output sorted into stacks of individual          Item    Change Default  gt   Darkness    Description    Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  easier to read  when the original contains faint  markings and dark images  see  Darkness  on page 59        Change Default  gt   Original Type    Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  type for the current copy job  see  Original  on page 59                                               pages   2 5     a c0                                                             Change Default 5  Reduce Enlarge       Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image  see   Reduced or enlarged copy  on page 60      KU If the machine is set Eco mode  reduce and  enlarge features are not available              Change Default 5  Adjust Bkgd       Prints an image without its background  This copy  feature removes the background color and can be  helpful when copying an original containing color in  the background  such as a newspaper or a catalog     e Off  Does not use this feature   e Auto  Optimizes the background        Enhance Lev 1 2  The higher the number is  the  more vivid the background is       Erase Lev 1 4  The higher the number is  the lighter  the background is     3  Useful Settin
230. r Manager  gt     Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device Settings  see  Device Settings  on  page 269     e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models     1 Select KE  Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Maintenance  gt  TonerLow Alert on the control panel   2 Select the option you want     3 Press OK to save the selection     3  Maintenance    Cleaning the machine                   If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment  you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing  condition and use your machine longer     A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol  solvents  or other strong substances can discolor or distort the  cabinet       If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner  we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it  If you use a vacuum  cleaner  toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you     Cleaning the outside    Clean the machine cabinet with a soft  lint free cloth  Dampen the cloth slightly with water  but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine     3  Maintenance 8o    Cleaning the machine    Cleaning the inside    During the printing process  paper  toner  and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine  This buildup can cause print quality problems  such as toner specks  or smearing  Cleaning the inside of the machine clears 
231. r country  see  Features by model  on page 7      C46xW                   1   Rear cover 5 Telephone line socket  LINE    2   Power receptacle 6 Extension telephone socket  EXT    3   USB port   4   Network port                   1 Rear cover 3 USB port       2   Power receptacle 4 Network port       1  Introduction 22    Control panel overview       e This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model  There are various types of control panels        e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country  see  Features by model  on page 7      C46xW                                        13 12 11 10 4 9  1 WPS Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer  see  Using the WPS button  on page 162    2   Scan to Switches between scan and copy mode  The Scan to LED turns on scan mode and turns off on copy mode   3   Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation   4 Arrows Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values           1  Introduction 23      Control panel overview                                  5   Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus  see  Menu overview  on page 31    Menu KE   6  OK Confirms the selection on the screen    7 Stops an operations at any time   Stop Clear P P y   8  Power     Turns the power on or off  or wakes up the machine from the power save mode  If you need to turn the machin
232. r has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared  Check the display message   When the problem is cleared  the machine resumes   Blinking   Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge  The estimated cartridge life  of toner is close  Prepare a new  cartridge for replacement  You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner  see  Status  Redistributing toner  on page 79     Red      Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life   It is recommended to replace the toner  cartridge  see  Replacing the toner cartridge  on page 81        The cover is opened  Close the cover   On e There is no paper in the tray when receiving or printing data  Load paper in the tray     e The machine has stopped due to a major error  Check the display message  see  Understanding display  messages  on page 107      e A paper jam has occurred  see  Clearing paper jams  on page 101               4  Troubleshooting 105      Understanding the status LED                               LED Status Description   Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network    Wireless  Blue On The machine is connected to a wireless network  see  Wireless network setup  on page 159    Off The machine is disconnected from a wireless network   On The machine is in power save mode    Power Wakeup      Blue  Off The machine is in ready mode or machine   s power is off   On Eco mode is on    Eco Green The default setting of Eco mode is 2 up and tone
233. r save   Off Eco mode is off   On Eco mode is on    Scan to  Green The default setting of Eco mode is 2 up and toner save   Off Eco mode is off              a  Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life  which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798  The number of pages  may be affected by operating environment  percentage of image area  printing interval  graphics  media and media size  Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is  on and the printer stops printing     b  Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country  see  Control panel overview  on page 23      4  Troubleshooting 106    Understanding display messages    Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status  or errors  Refer to the tables below to understand the messages    and their  meaning  and correct the problem  if necessary     2             This function is not supported for the devices which has a control panel  display  You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer s  Printing Status window  see  Using Samsung Printer Status  on page  271      Ifa message is not in the table  reboot the power and try the printing job  again  If the problem persists  call a service representative     When you call for service  provide the service representative with the  contents of display message     Some messages may not appear on the display depending 
234. r the NFC tag   nec  on your printer  Registering Google Cloud Printer    Wait few seconds for the cell phone to connect to the printer        For some cell phones  NFC antenna might not be located at the back of  the cell phone  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your cell phone  before tagging     e If error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a changed  PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  update the PIN number     The printer starts scanning the content     The scanned data is saved on your cell phone     If you want to continue scanning  follow the instruction on the app screen        Check that NFC and Wi Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile  device and Wi Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer     Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device  usually located on the back of  the mobile device  over the NFC tag   nec  on your printer     Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start        2  Using a Network Connected Machine 196    Using the NFC feature    2 R       For some mobile devices  NFC tag might not be located at the back of the  mobile device  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile  device before tagging     If error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a changed  PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  update the PIN number     If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile  devices  it automatically connects 
235. r to use Unified Driver ae  Gane     Configurator  see  Installation for Linux  on page 144     e l  C inean        Add Printer   After the driver is installed on your Linux system  the Unified Driver Configurator n  icon will automatically be created on your desktop        Remove Printer    Stop    Test    Properties     Opening Unified Driver Configurator       About       1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop        You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified  Driver  gt  Unified Driver Configurator  Selected printer    Local printer idie   Model  URI          2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding  configuration window        1 Printer Configuration  2 Port Configuration    2 To use the on screen help  the Help or   button from the window     After changing the configurations  click Exit to close the Unified Driver  Configurator     5  Useful Management Tools    Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator          Printers configuration 1 Switches to Printers configuration     2   Shows all of the installed machines           Printers configuration has the two tabs  Printers and Classes        3   Shows the status  model name  and URI of your machine     i Th int trol buttons are  as follows   Printers tab e printer control bu W       Refresh  Renews the available machines list   View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon    Add Printer  Allows you to add a new mac
236. r translated to produce others  but which is not  itself copied or derived from something else        Open Systems Interconnection  OSI  is a model developed by the International  Organization for Standardization  ISO  for communications  OSI offers a  standard  modular approach to network design that divides the required set of  complex functions into manageable  self contained  functional layers  The layers  are  from top to bottom  Application  Presentation  Session  Transport  Network   Data Link and Physical     PABX       A private automatic branch exchange  PABX  is an automatic telephone  switching system within a private enterprise     PCL       Printer Command Language  PCL  is a Page Description Language  PDL   developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard   Originally developed for early inkjet printers  PCL has been released in varying  levels for thermal  dot matrix printer  and laser printers     PDF       Portable Document Format  PDF  is a proprietary file format developed by  Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device  independent and resolution independent format     Glossary 335    Glossary    PostScript    Protocol          PostScript  PS  is a page description language and programming language used  primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas    that is run in an  interpreter to generate an image     Printer Driver       A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer 
237. ral Communications Commission  FCC        Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15    Low power  Radio LAN devices  radio frequency  RF  wireless communication  devices   operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band  may be present  embedded  in  your printer system  This section is only applicable if these devices are present   Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices     Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the  United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label     The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm  8 inches  separation between the  device and the body  for use of a wireless device near the body  this does not  include extremities   This device should be used more than 20 cm  8 inches   from the body when wireless devices are on  The power output of the wireless  device  or devices   which may be embedded in your printer  is well below the  RF exposure limits as set by the FCC     This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  other antenna or transmitter     Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions   1  This  device may not cause harmful interference  and  2  this device must accept any  interference received  including interference that may cause undesired    operation of the device   5  Appendix 128    Regulatory information                Wireless devices are not user serviceable  Do not modify them in any way   Modification to a wire
238. rd  Wait for the machine  to cool down  If your machine has a power switch  turn the power switch  off before cleaning the machine     e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine  depending on its options or models  Check your machine type  see   Front view  on page 20      1 Slightly dampen a soft  lint free cloth or paper towel with water        White bar   Document feeder glass  White sheet   Scanner lid   Scanner glass    2 Lift and open the scanner lid     UAWN      4 Close the scanner lid     3  Maintenance a2     I Tips for moving  amp  storing your machine    When moving the machine  do not tilt or turn it upside down  Otherwise  the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner  which can cause damage to  the machine or reduce print quality     When moving the machine  make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely     3  Maintenance Ee    4  Troubleshooting    This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error     Tips for avoiding paper jams 95  Clearing original document jams 96  Clearing paper jams 101  Understanding the status LED 105  Understanding display messages 107    WA This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error  If your machine  has a display screen  check the message on the display screen first to solve the error              If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter  refer to the Troubleshooting  chapter in the Advanced Guide 
239. redialling        Sets a prefix of up to five digits  This number dials  Prefix Dial before any automatic dial number is started  It is useful  for accessing a PABX exchange        Sends faxes using error correction mode  ECM  to  ECM Mode makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any  error  It may take more time        Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax  transmission was successfully completed or not  If you  select On Error  the machine prints a report only when  a transmission is not successful     Fax Confirm        Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of       I TCR  maga the first page of the fax sent    Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse  This  Dial Mode setting may not be available depending on your    country        3  Useful Setting Menus gg    Fax    PP Item  Receiving setup       Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or    Auto Reduction    Description    Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the  size of the paper loaded in the machine        Discards a specific length from the end of the received  fax        Blocks any unwanted faxes that you stored in the  memory as junk fax numbers  This setting may not be  available depending on your country        models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on Discarg slze  page 31    Junk Fax Setup  To change the menu options   Press 45  fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Setup  gt  Receiving on the control panel   DRPD
240. res in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7              e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models        Altitude adjustment    Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure  which is determined by the  height of the machine above sea level  The following information will guide you  on how to set your machine for the best print quality     Before you set the altitude value  determine the altitude where you are   Normal  0 1 000 m 3 280 ft   High1  1 000 m 3 280 ft  2 000 m 6 561 ft   High2  2 000 m 6 561 ft  3 000 m 9 842 ft   High3  3 000 m 9 842 ft  4 000 m 13 123 ft     You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer    Manager program     For Windows and Mac users  you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager     gt  JE  Switch to advanced mode   gt  Device Settings  See  Device  Settings  on page 269     KA e If your machine is connected to the network  you can set the altitude via  SyncThru    Web Service  see  Using SyncThru    Web Service  on page  264      You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine s  display  see  Machine s basic settings  on page 37         4  Special Features 224    Entering various characters    As you perform various tasks  you may need to enter names and numbers  For  example  when you set up your machine  you enter your name or your Key Assigned numbers  letters  or characters          company   s name  and the fax number  When you store fax n
241. rest    recycling location  go to our website  www samsung com recyclingdirect Or      call   877  278   0799 FCC information to the user       This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to the  following two conditions     State of California Proposition 65 Warning  US Only        e This device may not cause harmful interference  and    The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California   This device must accept any interference received  including interference  to publish a list of chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity that may cause undesired operation   and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such chemicals     WARNING  This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer  This ORREN has been tested and found to comply with me urate for a Class  birth defects or other reproductive harm  B digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed  This applange can cause lawleyelexposure kobra chemical  to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  which can be minimized by operating the appliance in a well ventilated area        i f    installation  This equipment generates  uses and can radiate radio frequency  energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions  may  cause harmful interference to radio communications  However  th
242. revent damage  do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes  Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary     e Before closing the front cover  make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly     3  Maintenance G    WI     SIS    imaging uni        Replacing the       3  Maintenance    Monitoring the supplies life    If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems  check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned  Replace the corresponding parts  if  necessary     4 It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models        Select KE  Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Maintenance  gt  Supplies Life on the control panel   1    2 Select the option you want and press OK   Total  Displays the total number of pages printed   ADF Scan  Displays the number of pages printed by using the document feeder   Platen Scan  Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass     Supplies Info   Prints the supply information page     3 Press  Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     3  Maintenance    Setting the toner low alert    If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low  a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears  You can set the option for whether or not  this message or LED appears     2 e You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program         For Windows and Mac users  you set from Samsung Easy Printe
243. rint     2 Enter the destination fax number  email address  or server address and  press OK   3 Enter the starting tim and ending time  then press OK     4 Press  Cancel or Stop Clear  to return to ready mode     Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine     Receiving a fax in the computer    a       A W N      This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods   see  Features by model  on page 7      e To use this feature  set the option on the control panel     Press  amp   fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Rev  Forward  gt  Forward  to PC  gt  Forward the control panel     Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager   Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List   Select Fax to PC Settings menu     Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings   Image Type  Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF   Save Location  Select location to save the converted faxes   Prefix  Select prefix     Print received fax  Set to print information for the received fax after  receiving the fax     Notify me when complete  Set to show the popup window to  notify receiving a fax     4  Special Features 254    l Fax features    Open with default application  After receiving the fax  open it with  default application  To use the Ans Fax mode  attach an answering machine to the EXT socket  on the back of your machine        None  After receiving a fax  the machine does not notify the user or  opens the application   DRPD 
244. rint     Printing from the Chrome browser       The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser     QAU Bp W N      Run Chrome     Open the document or email that you want to print     Click the wrench icon      in the browser s top right corner     Click Print  A new tab for printing appears   Select Print with Google Cloud Print     Click the Print button     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 202    3  Useful Setting Menus    This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine  and the method of setting for advanced  machine setup     Before you begin reading a chapter  Print   Copy   Fax   Scan    System setup    Network setup       Before you begin reading a chapter    This chapter explains all the features available for this series  models to help users easily understand the features    You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide  see  Menu overview  on page 31     The following are tips for using this chapter  The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions  These menus can be accessed by pressing 23   Menu    Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine   For models that do not have the Z3   Menu  on the control panel  this feature is not applicable  see  Control panel overview  on page 23      Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models    
245. rinter Experience   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or downloads     4 Click Install     If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  V4 driver is not   installed  If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen  you can   download from the Samsung website  www samsung com  gt  find your   product  gt  Support or downloads     From the Start Screen    1 Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered  on     2 Make sure that the machine is powered on     3 Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable     The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update     Quick Guide for Windows 8 User 1303      Installing the driver locally    From the Desktop Screen    KA If you install the driver using the supplied software CD  you cannot use the  installed driver from the Start screen        1 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive     If the installation window does not appear  from Charms  select Search   gt  Apps and search for Run  Type in X  Setup exe  replacing    X    with the  letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK     KA If    Tap to choose what happens with this disc     pop up window appears   click the window and select Run Setup exe        2 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation  window  Then  click Next     3 Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen  Then   click Next     4 Follow the instructions in the installati
246. rotective cover removed from  laser scanner assembly  The reflected beam  although invisible  can damage  your eyes     When using this product  these basic safety precautions should always be  followed to reduce risk of fire  electric shock  and injury to persons        GEFAHREN    ATTENZIONE      PRECAUCION      PERIGO    GEVAAR      ADVARSEL      ADVARSEL    VARNING      VAROITUS    it 5  x  zx      CLASSE 3B  RADIAGAO LASER INVISIVEL AO ABRIR       KLASSE 3B  USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL      LUOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASER SATEILYA      CLASS Bo PRHA  ARTI MAXA ie ta   220 Se IB H 7H  HOX SALMO  HS SUC     CAUTION   CLASS 3B  INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION  WHEN OPEN  AVOID EXPOSURE TO  THE BEAM   ATTENTION   CLASSE 3B  RADIATION LASER INVISIBLE  EN CAS D OUVERTURE  EVITER  L EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU     KLASSE 3B  UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN  GEOFFNET  STRAHLENAUSSETZUNG VERMEIDEN     CLASSE 3B  RADIAZIONI LASER INVISIBILI CON IL  DISPOSITIVO APERTO  EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL RAGGIO     RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE DE CLASE 3B PRESENTE  AL ABRIR  EVITE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ     EVITE EXPOSIGAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE    KLASSE 3B  ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALING INDIEN  GEOPEND  VERMIJD BLOOTSTELLING AAN DE STRAAL   KLASSE 3B  USYNLIG LASERSTRAL NG VED ABNING   UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALING        APNES  UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN     KLASS 3B OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL  AR OPPNAD  STRALEN AR FARLIG     AVATTUNA  VALTA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE           BAO  SS TotyAle        
247. rs  gt  Adda printer  Click Add a network printer from the wizard          The machine that does not support the network interface  it will not be  di able to use this feature  see  Features by model  on page 7               The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista   or later version that are  the WSD compliant computer     The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer     Installing a WSD Printer Driver       1 SelectStart  gt  Control Panel  gt  Devices and Printers  gt  Add a printer   2 Click Add a network  wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard     3 In the printers list  select the one you want to use  and then click Next     4  Special Features ga    Scan features    Scanning using the WSD feature       KA e The IP address for WSD printer is http   IP address ws   example  http     111 111 111 111 ws       If no WSD printer is displayed in the list  click The printer that I want  isn t listed  gt  Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and  select Web Services Device from Device type  Then enter the printer s  IP address        1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     2 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on  page 48      4 Follow the instructions in the installation window   Select  scan   gt  Scan to WSD on the control panel     WW    eo If you see Not Available message  check the port con
248. s management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine     Easy Capture Manager 260  Samsung Easy Color Manager 261  Samsung AnyWeb Print 262  Easy Eco Driver 263  Using SyncThru    Web Service 264    Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 267    Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 270  Using Samsung Printer Status 271  Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 273         Easy Capture Manager    This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Software  on page 8         Available for Windows OS users only  see  Software  on page 8      Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard  Now you can easily print your captured screen as  captured or edited     5  Useful Management Tools 260    Samsung Easy Color Manager    Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties  such as brightness  contrast  and saturation  Color tone  changes can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine     This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  see  Software  on page 8         Available for Windows and Mac OS users only  see  Software  on page 8      Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like     Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it   http   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or Downloads      5  Us
249. s storage device  HDD        Mass storage device  HDD   commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk  is  a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly  rotating platters with magnetic surfaces     The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and  Electronics Engineers  IEEE   The term  1284 B  refers to a specific connector  type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral  for example   a printer      Intranet       A private network that uses Internet Protocols  network connectivity  and  possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an  organization s information or operations with its employees  Sometimes the  term refers only to the most visible service  the internal website     IP address       An Internet Protocol  IP  address is a unique number that devices use in order to  identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet  Protocol standard     Glossary 332    Glossary    IPM    ITU T       The Images Per Minute  IPM  is a way of measuring the speed of a printer  An IPM  rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within  one minute     IPP       The Internet Printing Protocol  IPP  defines a standard protocol for printing as  well as managing print jobs  media size  resolution  and so forth  IPP can be used  locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers  and also supports access  control  aut
250. scanner glass  select Yes to add another  page  Load another original and press OK  When you have finished   select No when Another Page  appears     Confirming a transmission       When the last page of your original has been sent successfully  the machine  beeps and returns to ready mode     When something goes wrong while sending your fax  an error message appears  on the display  If you receive an error message  press  Cancel or Stop Clear     to clear the message and try to send the fax again     4  Special Features 250    Fax features    Click Print or OK   KA You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each       Ro   Enter the recipients    numbers and select the option  time sending a fax is completed  Press       fax   gt  IF   Menu   gt  Fax Setup     gt  Sending  gt  Send Report on the control panel     Select the Help menu from the window and click on any option you want to  know about     Sending a fax in the computer 6 Click Send         This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods 7 ae  4  see  Features by model  on page 7   Delaying a fax transmission    You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  present  You cannot send a color fax using this feature     la ut                You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine     To send a fax from your computer  the Samsung Network PC Fax program  must be installed  This program will be installed when you in
251. se Devices on Menu bar       Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your  machine in Bonjour Devices     For 10 6 10 9  select your device below SHARED   Set the scan options on this program     Scan and save your scanned image     4  Special Features    Scan features    KA e If scanning does not operate in Image Capture  update Mac OS to the  latest version        e For more information  refer to the Image Capture s help     e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software  such as Adobe  Photoshop     e You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software  Open the  Applications folder 5 Samsung folder 5 Samsung Scan Assistant     Scanning       1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  powered on     2 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop     3 Click the so button to switch to Scanners Configuration     4 Select the scanner on the list     Unified Driver Configurator      Scanners configuration    E     l       Selected scanner   Vendor    Model    Type              5 Click Properties   6 Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  documents face up into the document feeder  see  Loading originals  on    page 48      7 From the Scanner Properties window  click Preview     4  Special Features ga    Scan features    8 The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Editing an image with Image Manager  Preview Pane        The Image Manager application provides you with menu comma
252. sh performance  and could result in electric shock  or fire        Keep cleaning supplies away from children     Children could get hurt              The machine should be connected to the power level which is  specified on the label     If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using   contact the electrical utility company     a  AWG  American Wire Gauge    Do not disassemble  repair or rebuild the machine by yourself     It can damage the machine  Call a certified technician when the  machine needs repairing           To clean and operate the machine  strictly follow the user s guide  provided with the machine     Otherwise  you could damage the machine     1  Introduction      Safety information          Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean  from dust or water     Otherwise  this could result in electric shock or fire     When storing supplies such as toner cartridges  keep them away  from children     Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested                    e Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with  screws     e Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service  technician  Repair by non certified technicians could result in  fire or electric shock     e The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service  technician        Supply usage    A Caution       Do not disassemble the toner cartridge     Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested        For supplies that contain ton
253. space  As most faxes  consist mostly of white space  this minimizes the transmission time of most  faxes     MMR       Modified Modified READ  MMR  is a compression method recommended by ITU   TT 6     Modem       A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information  and also  demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information     MR       Modified Read  MR  is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4  MR  encodes the first scanned line using MH  The next line is compared to the first   the differences determined  and then the differences are encoded and  transmitted     Glossary 334    Glossary    NetWare    OSI       A network operating system developed by Novell  Inc  It initially used  cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC  and the network  protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack  Today NetWare  supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX     OPC       Organic Photo Conductor  OPC  is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for  print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer  and it is usually green or  rust colored and has a cylinder shape     An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage  in the printer  and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from    contact with the cartridge development brush  cleaning mechanism  and paper     Originals       The first example of something  such as a document  photograph or text  etc   which is copied  reproduced o
254. ss network        Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer     3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop     For Mac OS X 10 8  double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder    Beck  Sonos    4 Double click the MAC_Installer folder  gt  Installer OS X icon   5 Click Continue     6 Read the license agreement and click Continue     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    11 If Wireless Settings screen appears  select Using a direct wireless  connection and click Next     N            K  If below screen appears  press the Y   within 2 minutes                WPS  button from the control panel  If the screen does not appear  go to step 13     Wireless Settings         Wireless Settings       Select the Wireless Setup Method a on aaa  ad    To use your printer in a wireless network environment  you must configure the wireless  Setup will configure wireless settings for the printer now  network settings of the printer to communicate with your network access point or router     For accessing the printer securely  Setup requires your confirmation  Please press WPS    Please select a method to configure the wireless settings from the options below  button on your printer     Using a direct wireless connection ka 4 Ka   Configure wireless settings for the printer through a direct wireless connection   between your computer and printer  Setup will connect your computer to the printer   wirelessly    While c
255. ss network     Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer       Go Back Continue    11 If Wireless Settings screen appears  select Using a USB cable and click  Next     If the screen does not appear  go to step 15     Wireless Settings       Select the Wireless Setup Method    Setup will configure wireless settings for the printer now     Please select a method to configure the wireless settings from the options below      _  Using a direct wireless connection    Configure wireless settings for the printer through a direct wireless connection    between your computer and printer  Setup will connect your computer to the printer  wirelessly     While configuring the wireless settings for the printer  your Internet may be  disconnected   _  Using a USB cable    Configure wireless settings to the printer through a USB connection     lt  Back   Next  gt      Cancel          2  Using a Network Connected Machine  FA     Wireless network setup    12    L        After searching  the window shows the wireless network devices  Select  the name  SSID  of the access point you want to use and click Next     When you set the wireless configuration manually  click Advanced Setting     e Enter the wireless Network Name  Enter the SSID of the access point   SSID is case sensitive      e Operation Mode  Select Infrastructure     e Authentication  Select an authentication type   Open System  Authentication is not used  and encryption may or may  not be used  depend
256. ss network by pressing both the 43  WPS  button on the  control panel of your machine and the WPS  PBC  button on a Wi Fi Protected  Setup    WPS enabled access point  or wireless router  respectively     The Personal Identification Number  PIN  method helps you connect your  machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi   Fi Protected Setup    WPS enabled access point  or wireless router      Factory default in your machine is PBC mode  which is recommended for a  typical wireless network environment     If your machine does not have a display screen  you can enable or disable  the Wi Fi Direct feature with the WPS button        aii    e Press and hold the  3  WPS  button on the control panel for about 10   15 seconds  Wi Fi Direct feature turns on     Press and hold the  5  WPS  button on the control panel for more than  15 seconds  Wi Fi Direct feature turns off     e Toget more information about the Wi Fi Direct feature  read the  Setting  the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing  on page 186     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 162     Wireless network setup       2 You can change the WPS mode in control panel  FZ  Menu  5 Network 5    Wireless  gt  OK  gt  WPS Setting      Machines with a display screen       Connecting in PBC mode    1    3    Press and hold the  3  WPS  button on the control panel for more than  2 seconds     The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS   PBC  button on the access point  or 
257. ss signal     Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal  including a microwave  oven and some Bluetooth devices     e Whenever the configuration of your access point  or wireless router   changes  you must do the product s wireless network setup again        The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is  3     e If Wi Fi Direct is ON  this machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g     e Ifthe access point is set to work with the 802 11n standard only  it may not  connect to your machine     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 191    Samsung Mobile Print    What is Samsung Mobile Print  Supported Mobile OS    Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos  e Android OS 2 1 or higher   documents  and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet  Samsung      05 4 0 or higher   Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones   but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC  It connects your mobile device to a   network sAnnRa kO samsUng printer orto    Mireles  printer throngia pee  access point  Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn   t   necessary   just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application  and it will  automatically detect compatible Samsung printers  Besides printing photos     web pages  and PDFs  scanning is also supported  If you have a Samsung   Android 2 1 or higher  Galaxy series and Android mobile devices  multifunction printer  scan any d
258. stalled the printer 1    Place a single document face down on the document glass  or load the  driver     documents face up into the document feeder     1 Open the document to be sent  Press PG  fax  on the control panel     2 Select Print from the File menu  Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs     The Print window will be displayed  It may look slightly different    Press IF   Menu   gt  Fax Feature  gt  Delay Send on the control panel   depending on your application     Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK   3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window    a uu fb W N    The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document     4  Special Features a    i Fax features    7    L        00          To enter more fax numbers  press OK when Yes highlights and repeat  steps 5     You can add up to 10 destinations     Once you entered a group dial number  you cannot enter another group  dial numbers anymore     Enter the job name and the time     If you set a time earlier than the current time  the fax will be sent at that time  on the following day     The original is scanned into memory before transmission     The machine returns to ready mode  The display reminds you that you  are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set     You can check the list of delayed fax jobs     Press IF   Menu   gt  System Setup  gt  Report  gt  Schedule Jobs on the  control panel     Adding documents to a reserved fax       4 
259. t in     Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet  or this could  result in electric shock           Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power  telephone or PC  interface cords     This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to your pet        Operating method  A Caution       Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing     It can cause damage to the machine        Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper  tray     You may get injured           Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper     New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts        When printing large quantities  the bottom part of the paper  output area may get hot  Do not allow children to touch     Burns can occur        When removing jammed paper  do not use tweezers or sharp metal  objects     It can damage the machine              Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray     It can damage the machine        1  Introduction E    Safety information             O Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening  A Caution  This could result in elevated component temperatures which can  cause damage or fire   i O Before moving the machine  turn the power off and disconnect all  Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other A mr Aa R      ba     eae   cords  The information below are only suggestions based on the  than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation   f  units wei
260. t or email with Chrome OS  Chrome  browser  or a Gmail     Google Docs    application on your mobile device  so you  don   t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device  Refer to the Google  website  http   support google com cloudprint  for more information about  Google Cloud Print        Registering your Google account to the printer    3 e Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or  wireless network that has access to the Internet        You should create your Google account in the advance     Open the Chrome browser   Visit www google com   Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address     Enter your printer   s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key  or click Go     A W N         5                   Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru    Web Service  website     If it   s your first time logging into SyncThru    Web Service you need to  log in as an administrator  Type in the below default ID and Password   We recommend you to change the default password for security  reasons     ID  admin    Password  sec00000    If the network environment is using a proxy server  you need to configure  the proxy   s IP and port number from Settings  gt  Network Settings  gt   Google Cloud Print  gt  Proxy Setting  Contact your network service  provider or network administrator for more information     When the SyncThru    Web Service window opens  click Settings  gt   Network Settings  gt  Google Cloud 
261. t to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless  network setting  you must contact the network administrator to get the  static IP address       For the DHCP method  If the IP address assignment method is DHCP  check if DHCP is shown in  the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window  If it shows Static  click  Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  address automatically  DHCP     e For the Static method  If the IP address assignment method is Static  check if Static is shown in  the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window  If it shows DHCP  click  Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  values for the machine   For example   If the computer   s network information is as shown follows     IP address  169 254 133 42    Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0  Then  the machine   s network information should be as below     IP address  169 254 133 43    11      Subnet Mask  255 255 0 0  Use the computer   s subnet mask      Gateway  169 254 133 1  The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears  Click Next     When the wireless network settings are completed  disconnect the USB  cable between the computer and machine  Click Next     Follow the instructions in the installation window     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup    3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop     Setup using Mac e For Mac OS X 10 8  double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder     a   Double click the MAC_Install
262. tely turn off  personal injury or property damage  a the power switch and unplug the machine   Do not attempt  e The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of  S emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out   This could result in electric shock or fire   8 Do not bend  or place heavy objects on the power cord   E    p Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy  object could result in electric shock or fire   Sy Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord  do not handle the  pom  plug with wet hands   sa This could result in electric shock or fire        1  Introduction la    Safety information    A Caution       During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation   remove the power plug from the electrical outlet     This could result in electric shock or fire        Be careful  the paper output area is hot     Burns could occur           If the machine has been dropped  or if the cabinet appears  damaged  unplug the machine from all interface connections and  request assistance from qualified service personnel     Otherwise  this could result in electric shock or fire        If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions  have been followed  unplug the machine from all interface  connections and request assistance from qualified service  personnel     Otherwise  this could result in electric shock or fire        If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet  do not  attempt to force i
263. ter features provided by your printer driver  click Properties or Preferences in the application   s Print window to change the print    settings  The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use              on page 55      Item    Multiple Pages per  Side       _    rr       KA       Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine     Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about  see  Using help       Description    Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper  To print more than one page per sheet  the pages will be reduced in size and  arranged in the order you specify  You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet     4  Special Features 231    Printing features    Item Description  Prints a single page document onto 4  Poster 2x2   9  Poster 3x3   or 16  Poster 4x4  sheets of paper  for the purpose of pasting the sheets  Poster Printing together to form one poster size document     Select the Poster Overlap value  Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab  Le to make it easier to paste the sheets together     cab pn  B Nm    wine  Ws      410 mm  Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing
264. this computer using a USB cable     O Network connection   Connect the printer to the same network as this comput   If your printer is already connected to the network  the instaler wil detect the printer      Wireless network connection   Connect the printer to the same wireless network as this computer     IF your printer is not connected to the wireless network  the installer wil help you set up the wireless  network  This is only available for printers that support wireless networking     E  Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer             lt Back   Next gt     cancel             On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time  screen  select  Yes  I will set up my printer s wireless network  Then  click Next     If your printer is already connected on the network  select No  my  printer is already connected to my network     2  Using a Network Connected Machine     Wireless network setup    7 Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method    screen  Then  click Next           2  Connecting Printers Select the Wireless Setup Method    3  Select Software Setup will configure wireless settings for the printer now     4  Installation Please select a method to configure the wireless settings from the options below        Using a direct wireless connection  Configure wireless settings for the printer through a direct wireless connection between your computer    ind printer  Setup will connect your computer to the
265. ties   equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required  in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and  regulations in FCC Part 68  If such changes can be reasonably expected to render  any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company  communications facilities  or require modification or alteration of such terminal  equipment  or otherwise materially affect its use or performance  the customer  shall be given adequate notice in writing  to allow the customer an opportunity  to maintain uninterrupted service    5  Appendix 130    Regulatory information    FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not  expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to  operate this equipment  In the event that terminal equipment causes harm  to the telephone network  the telephone company should notify the  customer that service may be stopped  However  where prior notice is  instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company  impractical  the company may temporarily cease service  providing that    they     The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine  may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine  In some    The Ringer Equivalence Number  REN  is a measure of the electrical load placed  on the telephone line  and is useful for determining whether you have     overloaded    the line  Install
266. ting  on windows     ADVANCED    1  Software Installation         Installation for Mac 142 Before you begin reading a chapter 204  Reinstallation for Mac 143 Print 205  Installation for Linux 144 Copy 206  Reinstallation for Linux 145 Fax 209  Scan 213  2  Using a Network Connected System serap gio  Machine Network setup 221  Useful network programs 147 4  Special Features  Wired network setup 148  Installing driver over the network 151 Altitude adjustment 224  IPv6 configuration 156 Entering various characters 225  Wireless network setup 159 Setting up the fax address book 226  Samsung Mobile Print 192 Printing features 229  Using the NFC feature 193 Scan features 241  AirPrint 198 Fax features 250    Google Cloud Print 200       ADVANCED  5  Useful Management Tools             Easy Capture Manager 260  Samsung Easy Color Manager 261  Samsung AnyWeb Print 262  Easy Eco Driver 263  Using SyncThru    Web Service 264  Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 267  Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 270  Using Samsung Printer Status 271    Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 273    6  Troubleshooting       Paper feeding problems 277  Power and cable connecting problems 278  Printing problems 279  Printing quality problems 283  Copying problems 291  Scanning problems 292  Faxing problems 293    Operating system problems 295       1  Software Installation    This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the  mach
267. tion to ON provides the ability to send or  receive a fax while the line is busy  You can select to  send or receive a fax by either picking up the extension  phone receiver and pressing the Start button or by  pressing the On Hook Dial button and pressing the  Start button     3  Useful Setting Menus 212    Scan    Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  models  If so  it is not applicable to your machine  see  Menu overview  on  page 31         To change the menu options     in scan mode  press 23   Menu   gt  Scan Feature on the control panel           C46xW  When the Scan to button   s LED is on  the machine is in scan  4 mode              e C46xFW  Press D iscan  on the control panel     Item Description    Sets scan destination to a USB  You scan the originals and    USB Feature    save the scanned image to a USB device        Item    USB Feature  gt   Resolution    Description    Sets the image resolution        USB Feature  gt   Color Mode    Sets the color mode        USB Feature  gt   File Format    Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved  If you  select BMP  JPEG  TIFF  or PDF  you can select to scan  multiple pages           USB Feature  gt  Sets the image size     Original Size       USB Feature  gt  Sets the original document s type     Original Type       USB Feature  gt   Darkness       Adjusts the brightness level to scan     3  Useful Setting Menus 213    Scan    KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending o
268. to Samsung Mobile Print app  download page  Download the app and try again     3 Select device status icon     4 Select Google Cloud Print 5 Register Google Cloud Printer     5 Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device  usually located on the back of  the mobile device  over the NFC tag   nrc    on your printer     Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer           e For some mobile devices  NFC tag might not be located at the back of the  mobile device  Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile  device before tagging     e  f error message about changed PIN number appears  enter a changed  PIN number and press OK  Follow the instruction on the app screen to  update the PIN number     Confirm your printer in pop up window     Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print    service    2  Using a Network Connected Machine    AirPrint    Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature  Check the box  your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark           AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from iPhone  iPad and       iPod touch running the latest version of iOS     AirPrint             Setting up AirPrint    Bonjour mDNS  and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the  AirPrint feature  You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following  methods     1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network     2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer  Safari  or Firefox and ent
269. to exchange  data between disparate applications  The file format  as it is used in Microsoft  Excel  has become a de facto standard throughout the industry  even among  non Microsoft platforms     DADF          Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets  When collation is  selected  the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies     Control Panel       A control panel is a flat  typically vertical  area where control or monitoring  instruments are displayed  They are typically found in front of the machine     A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder  DADF  is a scanning unit that will  automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine  can scan on both sides of the paper     Default       The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state   reset  or initialized     Glossary gg    Glossary    DHCP    DPI          A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  DHCP  is a client server networking  protocol  A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP  client host requesting  generally  information required by the client host to  participate on an IP network  DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of  IP addresses to client hosts     DIMM    Dots Per Inch  DPI  is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and  printing  Generally  higher DPI results in a higher resolution  more visible detail  in the image  and a larger file size     DRPD          D
270. to the  printer     Print Media       The media like paper  labels  and transparencies which can be used in a printer   a scanner  a fax or  a copier     PPM       Pages Per Minute  PPM  is a method of measurement for determining how fast  a printer works  meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one  minute     PRN file       An interface for a device driver  this allows software to interact with the device  driver using standard input output system calls  which simplifies many tasks     A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection   communication  and data transfer between two computing endpoints     PS       See PostScript     PSTN       The Public Switched Telephone Network  PSTN  is the network of the world s  public circuit switched telephone networks which  on industrial premises  is  usually routed through the switchboard     RADIUS       Remote Authentication Dial In User Service  RADIUS  is a protocol for remote  user authentication and accounting  RADIUS enables centralized management  of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA   authentication  authorization  and accounting  concept to manage network  access     Resolution       The sharpness of an image  measured in Dots Per Inch  DPI   The higher the dpi     the greater the resolution   Glossary 336    Glossary    SMB    TCP IP       Server Message Block  SMB  is a network protocol mainly applied to share files   printers  serial ports  and miscellaneous c
271. to the machine  e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine   e Paper has not been loaded correctly  Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly   e There is too much paper in the tray  Remove excess paper from the tray       The paper is too thick  Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine        The paper keeps jamming  e There is too much paper in the tray  Remove excess paper from the tray  If you are printing on special materials  use the  manual feeding in tray     e Anincorrect type of paper is being used  Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine     e There may be debris inside the machine  Open the front cover and remove any debris        6  Troubleshooting    Power and cable connecting problems    PPO  we     LIL    Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems     Condition Suggested solutions    The machine is not receiving power  e Connect the machine to the electricity supply first  If the machine has a      Power Wakeup  button on the control   or the connection cable between the press it   computer and the machine is not    e Disconnect the machine s cable and reconnect it   connected properly        6  Troubleshooting      Printing problems    Condition    The machine does not  print     The machine is not receiving power     Possible cause Suggested solutions    Connect the machine to the electricity supply first  If the machine has a      Power   Wakeup  button on the co
272. ts          If white spots appear on the page     e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine  so the transfer roller may be  dirty  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89        The paper path may need cleaning  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89      If these steps do not correct the problem  contact a service representative     6  Troubleshooting 284    Printing quality problems    Condition    Vertical lines                   Suggested solutions    If black vertical streaks appear on the page       The surface  drum part  of the imaging unit inside the machine has probably been scratched  Remove the imaging unit and install  a new one  see  Replacing the imaging unit  on page 85      If white vertical streaks appear on the page     The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty  Clean the inside of your machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page  89   If these steps do not correct the problem  contact a service representative        Black or color background       AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc  AaBbCc             If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable     Change to a lighter weight paper     e Check the environmental conditions  very dry conditions or a high level of humidity  higher than 80  RH  can increase the amount  of background shading     e Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one  see  Replacing
273. twork settings are completed  disconnect the USB  cable between the computer and machine  Click Next     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wireless network setup       Access point without a USB cable  recommended  7 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement   8 Click Install  All components necessary for machine operations will be  Items to prepare installed       WiFi enabled Mac running Mac OS 10 7 or higher and an access point If you click Customize  you can choose individual components to install    router     9 Enter the password and click OK     Software CD that was provided with your machine       Peaschine iastaliad with awikelesenetworinterace 10 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection  Type and click Continue     1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and       OLC Printer Connection Type  owered on   p Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network     z x    _  USB Connected Printer  2 Insert the supplied software CD Into your CD ROM drive  g Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable   pe  Network Conneted Printer  Wired or Wireless   Ja Connect the printer to the same network as this computer     If you want to change IP address of your device  click  Set IP Address     Button   a Set P Address          lt   gt     Configuration of Wireless network          This is for users who have not set up the wireless connection before   The installer will help you set up the wirele
274. u can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google  Cloud Print enabled apps  see  Google Cloud Print  on page 200      Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you  captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard  see  Easy Capture  Manager  on page 260      Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that  monitors and informs you of the machine s status and allows you to  customize the machine s settings  see  Using Samsung Easy Printer  Manager  on page 267 or  Using Samsung Printer Status  on page 271      Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users compile  and share large documents or other scanned or faxed information digitally    see  Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  on page 270      AnyWeb Print helps you screen capture  preview  scrap  and print the  screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the  ordinary program  see  Samsung AnyWeb Print  on page 262         Key benefits      Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the  latest version during the printer driver installation process  This is available  only for Windows     If you have Internet access  you can get help  support application  machine  drivers  manuals  and order information from the Samsung website   www samsung com  gt  find your product  gt  Support or Downloads     Wide range of functionality and application support    Supports various paper sizes  see  Print me
275. ual Inline Memory Module  DIMM   a small circuit board that holds memory     DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data  received fax data     DLNA       The Digital Living Network Alliance  DLNA  is a standard that allows devices on  a home network to share information with each other across the network     DNS    Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several  different telephone numbers     Duplex       A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the  machine can print  or scan  on both sides of the paper  A printer equipped with  a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle     Duty Cycle          The Domain Name Server  DNS  is a system that stores information associated    with domain names in a distributed database on networks  such as the Internet     Dot Matrix Printer       A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that  runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact  striking an ink soaked  cloth ribbon against the paper  much like a typewriter     Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a  month  Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year   The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs  usually within the  warranty period  For example  if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per 
276. uch as remaining amount of toner  You can also print reports  such as an  error report     Active Alerts  Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their  severity     Supplies  Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in  the cartridge     Usage Counters  Shows the usage count by print types  simplex and  duplex     Current Settings  Shows the machine   s and network s information     Print information  Prints reports such as system related reports  e mail  address  and font reports     Settings tab       This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and  network  You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab     Machine Settings tab  Sets options provided by your machine     Network Settings tab  Shows options for the network environment  Sets  options such as TCP IP and network protocols     Security tab       This tab allows you to set system and network security information  You need to  log in as an administrator to view this tab     System Security  Sets the system administrator s information and also  enables or disables machine features     Network Security  Sets settings for IPv4 IPv6 filtering and Authentication  servers     Maintenance tab       This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and  setting contact information for sending emails  You can also connect to  Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu     Firmware Upgrade  Upgrade your machine s firmware  
277. umber must be provided to the telephone company     e  f your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges  we  recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the  telephone lines  Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or  telephone and electronic specialty stores     5  Appendix 131    Regulatory information    When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to  emergency numbers  use a non emergency number to advise the  emergency service dispatcher of your intentions  The dispatcher will give  you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number     This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines   This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids     You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of  a standard modular jack  USOC RJ 11C     Replacing the Fitted Plug  for UK Only        Important       The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard  BS 1363  13 amp plug  and has a 13 amp fuse  When you change or examine the fuse  you must re fit  the correct 13 amp fuse  You then need to replace the fuse cover  If you have lost  the fuse cover  do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover     Contact the people from you purchased the machine     The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable   However  some buildings  mainly old ones  do not have normal 13 amp plug  sockets  You need to buy a suitable plug 
278. umbers or email 1       1       addresses in memory  you may also enter the corresponding names     2 ABCabc2       3 DEFdef3                   Entering alphanumeric characters 4 GHIghi4  5 JKLjkI5  Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display  For example  to  enter the letter O  press 6  labeled with MNO  Each time you press 6  the display 6  MNOmno6  shows a different letter  M  N  O  m  n  o and finally 6  To find the letter that you 7 PORSpars7    want to enter  see  Keypad letters and numbers  on page 225        8 TUVtuv8       WXYZ 9  WA e You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice  Ki a                e To delete the last digit or character  press the left right or up down arrow 0  amp    0  button        ii eh 85O         These symbols are available when you type for network authentication                    lt  gt      Keypad letters and numbers  These symbols are available when you type for network authentication      2 e Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its  options or the models           e Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you  are doing     4  Special Features 225    Setting up the fax address book    You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via  SyncThru    Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by  entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book     Registering a speed dial number    N                Select pi  fax   
279. ung com   support    Contact SAMSUNG worldwide    Glossary    The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as  mentioned in this user   s guide        802 11       802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network  WLAN   communication  developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee  IEEE  802      802 11b g n       802 11b g n can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band  802 11b  supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps  802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150  Mbps  802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from  microwave ovens  cordless telephones  and Bluetooth devices     Access point       Access Point or Wireless Access Point  AP or WAP  is a device that connects  wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks   WLAN   and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals     ADF       An Automatic Document Feeder  ADF  is a scanning unit that will automatically  feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the  paper at once     AppleTalk       AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple  Inc for  computer networking  It was included in the original Mac  1984  and is now  deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking     BIT Depth       A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the  color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image  Hig
280. upport wireless networking  Check the machine s   user s guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and   prepare a wireless network machine  e The configured network address is unable to connect between your  computer and machine     PC Connection Error    Connecting Failure   SSID Not Found   Fora DHCP network environment  The machine is unable to find the network name  SSID  you have selected or The rageg the IP address automatically  DHCP  when computer is  entered  Check the network name  SSID  on your access point and try configured to DHOP     connecting again     Your access point is not turned on  Turn on your access point   Connecting Failure   Invalid Security    Security is not configured correctly  Check the configured security on your  access point and machine     2  Using a Network Connected Machine        Wireless network setup    If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode  the problem may be caused  by the automatically changed IP address  Compare the IP address between  the product s IP address and the printer port s IP address     How to compare   1 Print the network information report of your printer  and then check the  IP address  see  Printing a network configuration report  on page 148    2 Check the printer port s IP address from your computer   a Click the Windows Start menu     e For Windows 8  from Charms  select Search  gt  Settings   b For Windows XP Server 2003  select Printer and Faxes     e For Windows Server 2008 Vista 
281. urn the stack of paper over in the tray  Also try rotating the paper 180   in the tray     6  Troubleshooting    Printing quality problems    Condition    Wrinkles or creases          AaBbCc  AaBbCc          Suggested solutions    Ensure that the paper is loaded properly     Check the paper type and quality   Turn the stack of paper over in the tray  Also try rotating the paper 180   in the tray        Back of printouts are dirty       Check for leaking toner  Clean the inside of the machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89         Solid color or black pages          The imaging unit may not be installed properly  Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it     The imaging unit may be defective  Remove the imaging unit and install anew one  see  Replacing the imaging unit  on page 85      The machine may require repairing  Contact a service representative     6  Troubleshooting    Printing quality problems                               Condition Suggested solutions  Loose toner   Clean the inside of the machine  see  Cleaning the machine  on page 89    e Check the paper type and quality   fats e Remove the imaging unit and then  install a new one  see  Replacing the toner cartridge  on page 81    a C     8        A2e8bCc If the problem persists  the machine may require repair  Contact a service representative   As lt 0Cc  Aa Ke  Character voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black   e You may be printing on the wrong surface 
282. us  on page 203      Accessing the menu       Select the Fax  Copy  or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used   Select NE  Menu  until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK     Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK     1  4 If the setting item has sub menus  repeat step 3   5 Press OK to save the selection     Press  Stop Clear  to return to the ready mode     2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup 31     Menu overview    Darkness  Normal  Dark 1  Dark 5  Light 5  Light 1  Resolution  Standard  Fine  Super Fine  Photo Fax  Original Size  Multi Send  Delay Send  Priority Send    a  C46xFW only        Fax Feature     Send Forward  Forward to Fax  Rcv  Forward  Forward to Fax  Forward to PC  Forward amp Print  Secure Receive  Off  On  Print  Add Page    Cancel Job    b  This option may not be available depending on your country        Sending  Redial Times  Redial Term  Prefix Dial  ECM Mode  Fax Confirm     Image TCR    Dial Mode     Receiving  Receive Mode  Ring To Answer  Stamp RCV Name  RCV Start Code  Auto Reduction  Discard Size    Junk Fax Setup    DRPD Mode     Fax Setup    Change Default  Resolution  Darkness  Original Size   Auto Report  On  Off   Manual TX RX  On  Off       2  Menu Overview and Basic Setup EB    Menu overview    Original Size  Reduce Enlarge  Darkness  Normal  Dark 1  Dark 5  Light 5  Light 1  Original Type  Text Photo  Photo  Magazine  Text  Layout  Normal  2 Up  4 
283. ution for network administrators   SyncThru    Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing  network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network  machines from any site with corporate internet access     Download this program from http   solution samsungprinter com     SetIP wired network setup    This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually  configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol        See  IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Windows   on page 148   See  IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Mac   on page 149     See  IPv4 configuration using SetIP  Linux   on page 150           The machine that does not support the network port  it will not be able  4 to use this feature  see  Rear view  on page 22               e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program     2  Using a Network Connected Machine    Wired network setup    Printing a network configuration report       You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel  that will show the current machine s network settings  This will help you to set  upa network     Press the KE  Menu  button on the control panel and select Network  gt     Network Conf   Network Configuration      Using this Network Configuration Report  you can find your machine s MAC  address and IP address     For example   MAC Address  00 1 5 99 41 A2 78  IP Address  169 254 192 192    Setting IP address          The machine that does not support the n
284. vice can t be set to the H W  mode you want     e Port is being used by another  program     e Portis disabled       Scanner is busy receiving or  printing data  When the  current job is completed  try  again       Invalid handle       Scanning has failed        There may be a copying or printing job in progress  Try your job again when that job is finished   The selected port is currently being used  Restart your computer and try again    The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off    The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly    Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on  then restart your computer     The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off     6  Troubleshooting 292    Faxing problems    Condition    The machine is not working   there is no display  or the  buttons are not working     Suggested solutions    Unplug the power cord and plug it in again   e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet     e Ensure that the power is turned on        No dial tone     e Check that the phone line is properly connected  see  Rear view  on page 22      e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone        The numbers stored in memory  do not dial correctly     Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly  To check that  print an address book list        The original does not feed into  t
285. wireless router      Press the WPS  PBC  button on the access point  or wireless router      The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below     a Connecting  The machine is connecting to the access point  or  wireless router      b Connected  When the machine is successfully connected to the  wireless network  the WPS LED light stays on     c AP SSID  After completing the wireless network connection process   the AP   s SSID information appears on the display     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive  and follow the  instructions in the window to set up the wireless network     Connecting in PIN mode    1    3    Press and hold the 43  WPS  button on the control panel for more than  2 seconds     The eight digit PIN appears on the display     You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the  computer that is connected to the access point  or wireless router      The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below   Connecting  The machine is connecting to the wireless network     Connected  When the machine is successfully connected to the  wireless network  the WPS LED light stays on     c SSID Type  After completing the wireless network connection  process  the AP   s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display     Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive  and follow the  instructions in the window to set up the wireless network     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 163     Wireless n
286. xtremities  is typical  This device should be used more than 20 cm  8  inches  from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting     This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  other antenna or transmitter     Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices  Examples of  common restrictions are listed below     A    Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with  equipment on commercial aircraft  Current aviation regulations  require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane   IEEE 802 11  also known as wireless Ethernet  and Bluetooth  communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless  communication      gt     PBB  gt     In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or  services is harmful or perceived as harmful  the option to use a wireless  device may be restricted or eliminated  Airports  Hospitals  and  Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples  where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated  When in  environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless  devices  ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or  turning on the wireless device     Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices   Since your system is equipped with a wireless device  when traveling  between countries with your system  check with the local Radio  Approval authorities prior to
287. you are using WEP Encryption  select the appropriate  WEP Key Index     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 168     Wireless network setup    When the wireless network set up is completed  disconnect the USB  2 The wireless network security window appears when the access point has cable between the computer and machine  Click Next   security settings          Follow the instructions in the installation window   Enter the Network Password of the access point  or router   1 1    9 If your printer supports Wi Fi Direct  the following screen will appear     Click Next     Wi Fi Direct Settings    Your printer supports Wi Fi Direct     Since your printer is a Wi Fi enabled printer  you can use Wi Fi Direct to enable your mobile device to  easily connect to your printer     Do you want to tum on WI Fi Direct on your printer     F  Yes  1 want to tum on Wi Fi Direct on my printer                 Wi Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports  this feature              e Can start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager   see  Setting up Wi Fi Direct  on page 186      e Wi Fi Direct Name  The default Wi Fi Direct Name is the model name  and the maximum length is 22 characters     e Password setting is the numeric string  and the size is 8   64 characters     2  Using a Network Connected Machine 169    Wireless network setup    Access point without a USB cable  recommended        Items to prepare  e WiFi enabled PC running Windows 7 or hig
288. ze of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the    document     4  Special Features 233    Printing features                            Item Description  Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document  For example  you use it when you want to have large gray letters  reading    DRAFT    or    CONFIDENTIAL    printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document     oe   Watermark a To change the print settings from your software application  access Printing Preferences      b Click the Advanced tab  select Edit from the Watermark drop down list  The Edit Watermarks window appears    Creating   c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box   watermarig You can enter up to 256 characters  The message displays in the preview window    To change the print settings from your software application  access Printing Preferences    watermark Click the Advanced tab  select Edit from the Watermark drop down list  The Edit Watermarks window appears      Editing a watermark     Click Update to save the changes     a  b  c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options   d  e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window        Watermark     Deleting a  watermark        a To change the print settings from your software application  access Printing Preferences    b Click the Advanced ta
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Massive Suspension light 40519/17/10  Simpson Strong-Tie HRS12 Instructions / Assembly  Samsung YP-K3JAB manual de utilizador  ELPA  Philips 55PFL6606H 55" Full HD Smart TV Black  基本情報(特定福祉用具販売)  図面リスト A-01  Jabra SP700 User's Manual  User manual ENGLISH  MSI 645E Max2 (MS-6567) Motherboard    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file